--- /dev/null
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{2003-02-03.16}
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+% your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
+% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+%
+% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
+% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
+% what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+%
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+% ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/texinfo.tex
+% (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
+% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
+% and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
+%
+% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
+%
+% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+%
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
+% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
+% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
+%
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
+% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
+% tex foo.texi
+% texindex foo.??
+% tex foo.texi
+% tex foo.texi
+% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
+% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+%
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
+% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
+% full Texinfo distribution.
+
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+ \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexgtr=>
+\let\ptexhat=^
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexless=<
+\let\ptexplus=+
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
+\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
+\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
+
+% In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
+% in some cases the escape char.
+\chardef\colonChar = `\:
+\chardef\commaChar = `\,
+\chardef\dotChar = `\.
+\chardef\equalChar = `\=
+\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
+\chardef\questChar = `\?
+\chardef\semiChar = `\;
+\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
+\chardef\underChar = `\_
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+% True if #1 is the empty string, i.e., called like `\ifempty{}'.
+%
+\def\ifempty#1{\ifemptyx #1\emptymarkA\emptymarkB}%
+\def\ifemptyx#1#2\emptymarkB{\ifx #1\emptymarkA}%
+
+% Hyphenation fixes.
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
+\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
+\hyphenation{eshell}
+\hyphenation{white-space}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen\bindingoffset
+\newdimen\normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
+% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
+% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\def\loggingall{%
+ \tracingstats2
+ \tracingpages1
+ \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
+ \tracingparagraphs1
+ \tracingoutput1
+ \tracingmacros2
+ \tracingrestores1
+ \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
+ \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+ \tracingscantokens1
+ \tracingifs1
+ \tracinggroups1
+ \tracingnesting2
+ \tracingassigns1
+ \fi
+ \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
+ \errorcontextlines\maxdimen
+}%
+
+% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
+% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
+%
+\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
+ \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
+\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
+ \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
+\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
+ \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+%
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+ \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+ %
+ \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+ \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+ %
+ % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+ % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+ \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+ \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+ %
+ {%
+ % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+ % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+ % before the \shipout runs.
+ %
+ \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
+ \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
+ \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+ % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+ \shipout\vbox{%
+ % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
+ \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
+ %
+ \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+ \hsize = \outerhsize
+ \vskip-\topandbottommargin
+ \vtop to0pt{%
+ \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \line{%
+ \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+ \hfill
+ \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+ }%
+ \vss}%
+ \vskip\topandbottommargin
+ \line\bgroup
+ \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+ \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \fi
+ %
+ \unvbox\headlinebox
+ \pagebody{#1}%
+ \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+ % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+ % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+ % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+ \vskip 2\baselineskip
+ \unvbox\footlinebox
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifcropmarks
+ \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+ \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+ \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+ \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+ \vbox to0pt{\vss
+ \line{%
+ \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+ \hfill
+ \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+ }%
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+ }%
+ \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+ \fi
+ }% end of \shipout\vbox
+ }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
+ \advancepageno
+ \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+ \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+ {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+ {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg#1{%
+ \let\next = #1%
+ \begingroup
+ \obeylines
+ \futurelet\temp\parseargx
+}
+
+% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
+% the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
+\def\parseargx{%
+ % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
+ \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
+ \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
+ \else
+ \expandafter\parseargline
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
+{\obeyspaces %
+ \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
+
+{\obeylines %
+ \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+ \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+ %
+ % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
+ % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
+ \argremovec #1\c\relax %
+ \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
+ %
+ % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
+ \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+ }%
+}
+
+% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
+% do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
+% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
+% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+
+% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+% @end itemize @c foo
+% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
+% `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
+% result to \toks0.
+%
+% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
+% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
+% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
+% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
+% here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
+% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
+% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
+%
+\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \ignoreactivespaces
+ \edef\temp{#1}%
+ \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+%
+\begingroup
+ \obeyspaces
+ \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
+%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
+\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
+\def\ENVcheck{%
+\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
+\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+
+% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+
+\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+
+\def\beginxxx #1{%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
+\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+%
+\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
+\def\endxxx #1{%
+ \removeactivespaces{#1}%
+ \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
+ %
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
+ % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
+ \else
+ \unmatchedenderror\endthing
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
+ \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+ \fi
+}
+
+% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
+%
+\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+}
+
+% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+%
+\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+ % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
+ % and @{ and @} for the aux file.
+ \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
+ \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+ \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
+ !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
+ !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
+ !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
+ !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
+!endgroup
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
+ \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
+ \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+ \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
+% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
+% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
+% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
+% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
+% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
+%
+\newbox\groupbox
+\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
+%
+\def\group{\begingroup
+ \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+ \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+ \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
+ % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
+ % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
+ % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+ % above. But it's pretty close.
+ \def\Egroup{%
+ \egroup % End the \vtop.
+ % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+ \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+ % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+ \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+ % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+ % group, force a page break.
+ \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+ \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
+ \page
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \copy\groupbox
+ \endgroup % End the \group.
+ }%
+ %
+ \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
+ % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
+ % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
+ % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
+ % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
+ % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
+ % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
+ \everypar = {\strut}%
+ %
+ % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
+ % normal interline spacing.
+ \offinterlineskip
+ %
+ % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
+ % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
+ % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
+ % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
+ % empty paragraph.
+ \ifx\par\lisppar
+ \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
+ %
+ % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
+ \obeylines
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+ % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+ % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
+ % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
+ % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+ % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+ \comment
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
+
+\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\def\needx#1{%
+ % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+ % paragraph.
+ \par
+ %
+ % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
+ \dimen0 = #1\mil
+ \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
+ \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
+ \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
+ %
+ % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
+ % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
+ % And a page break here is fine.
+ \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
+ %
+ % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+ % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
+ % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+ % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+ % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
+ %
+ % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+ % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+ % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+ % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+ % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
+ % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+ % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+ \penalty9999
+ %
+ % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+ \kern -#1\mil
+ %
+ % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+ \nobreak
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @br forces paragraph break
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox to 1.5em{%
+ \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+ .\hss.\hss.%
+ \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+ }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox to 2em{%
+ \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+ .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
+ \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+ }%
+ \spacefactor=3000
+}
+
+
+% @page forces the start of a new page
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
+\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
+\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
+% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
+% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
+%
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+%
+\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
+ \nobreak
+ \kern-\strutdepth
+ \vtop to \strutdepth{%
+ \baselineskip=\strutdepth
+ \vss
+ % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
+ % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
+ \ifx#1l%
+ \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
+ \else
+ \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
+ \fi
+ \null
+ }%
+}}
+\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
+\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
+%
+% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
+% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
+% else use TEXT for both).
+%
+\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
+\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+ \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
+ \def\righttext{#2}%
+ \else
+ \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
+ \def\righttext{#1}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifodd\pageno
+ \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
+ \else
+ \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
+ \fi
+ \temp
+}
+
+% @include file insert text of that file as input.
+% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\include{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+ \catcode`~=\other
+ \catcode`^=\other
+ \catcode`_=\other
+ \catcode`|=\other
+ \catcode`<=\other
+ \catcode`>=\other
+ \catcode`+=\other
+ \parsearg\includezzz}
+% Restore active chars for included file.
+\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
+ % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+ \def\thisfile{#1}%
+ \let\value=\expandablevalue
+ \input\thisfile
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line
+% outputs that line, centered.
+%
+\def\center{\parsearg\docenter}
+\def\docenter#1{{%
+ \ifhmode \hfil\break \fi
+ \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+ \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+ \line{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+ \ifhmode \break \fi
+}}
+
+% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
+\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+\commentxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
+% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+%
+\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
+\def\noneword{none}
+%
+\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
+\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\asisword
+ \else
+ \ifx\temp\noneword
+ \defaultparindent = 0pt
+ \else
+ \defaultparindent = #1em
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \parindent = \defaultparindent
+}
+
+% @exampleindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
+% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
+% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
+\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
+\def\doexampleindent#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\asisword
+ \else
+ \ifx\temp\noneword
+ \lispnarrowing = 0pt
+ \else
+ \lispnarrowing = #1em
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
+% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
+% to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
+% superscripts, special math chars, etc.
+%
+\let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
+%
+% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
+% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
+% _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
+% if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
+%
+{\catcode\underChar = \active
+\gdef\mathunderscore{%
+ \catcode\underChar=\active
+ \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+}}
+%
+% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
+% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
+% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
+% otherwise define @\.
+%
+% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
+\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
+%
+\def\math{%
+ \tex
+ \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
+ \let\\ = \mathbackslash
+ \mathactive
+ \implicitmath\finishmath}
+\def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
+
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an
+% argument to a command which set the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+%
+{
+ \catcode`^ = \active
+ \catcode`< = \active
+ \catcode`> = \active
+ \catcode`+ = \active
+ \gdef\mathactive{%
+ \let^ = \ptexhat
+ \let< = \ptexless
+ \let> = \ptexgtr
+ \let+ = \ptexplus
+ }
+}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
+\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+ \iflinks
+ \readauxfile
+ \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+ \openindices
+ \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+ \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+ %
+ % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+ % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+ % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
+ \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+ \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
+ \closein1
+ \temp
+ %
+ \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% Called from \setfilename.
+%
+\def\openindices{%
+ \newindex{cp}%
+ \newcodeindex{fn}%
+ \newcodeindex{vr}%
+ \newcodeindex{tp}%
+ \newcodeindex{ky}%
+ \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{pdf,}
+% adobe `portable' document format
+\newcount\tempnum
+\newcount\lnkcount
+\newtoks\filename
+\newcount\filenamelength
+\newcount\pgn
+\newtoks\toksA
+\newtoks\toksB
+\newtoks\toksC
+\newtoks\toksD
+\newbox\boxA
+\newcount\countA
+\newif\ifpdf
+\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
+
+\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+ \pdffalse
+ \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+ \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+ \let\endlink = \relax
+ \let\linkcolor = \relax
+ \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+\else
+ \pdftrue
+ \pdfoutput = 1
+ \input pdfcolor
+ \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
+ \def\imagewidth{#2}%
+ \def\imageheight{#3}%
+ % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
+ % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+ \immediate\pdfimage
+ \else
+ \immediate\pdfximage
+ \fi
+ \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
+ \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
+ #1.pdf%
+ \else
+ {#1.pdf}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
+ \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
+ \fi}
+ \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
+ \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
+ \let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light?
+ \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
+ % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
+ % come from Petr Olsak
+ \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
+ \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
+ \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
+ \advance\tempnum by1
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
+ \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
+ \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+ \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
+ \closein 1
+ % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
+ \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
+ \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
+ %
+ \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
+ \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
+ \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
+ \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
+ \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
+ \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
+ \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
+ \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
+ \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
+ \input \jobname.toc
+ \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
+ \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
+ \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
+ \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
+ \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
+ \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
+ \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
+ \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
+ \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
+ \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
+ \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
+ \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
+ \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
+ %
+ % Make special characters normal for writing to the pdf file.
+ %
+ \indexnofonts
+ \let\tt=\relax
+ \turnoffactive
+ \input \jobname.toc
+ \endgroup\fi
+ }}
+ \def\makelinks #1,{%
+ \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
+ \ifx\params\E
+ \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
+ \else
+ \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
+ \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
+ \picknum{#1}%
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
+ goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
+ \linkcolor #1%
+ \advance\lnkcount by 1%
+ \endlink
+ \fi
+ \nextmakelinks
+ }
+ \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
+ \def\pn#1{%
+ \def\p{#1}%
+ \ifx\p\lbrace
+ \let\nextpn=\ppn
+ \else
+ \let\nextpn=\ppnn
+ \def\first{#1}
+ \fi
+ \nextpn
+ }
+ \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
+ \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
+ \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
+ \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+ \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
+ \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
+ \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
+ \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
+ \advance\filenamelength by 1
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \nextsp}
+ \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+ \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
+ \else
+ \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
+ \fi
+ \def\pdfurl#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
+ \let\value=\expandablevalue
+ \leavevmode\Red
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+ user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
+ % #1
+ \endgroup}
+ \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
+ \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+ \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
+ \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
+ \def\maketoks{%
+ \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
+ \ifx\first0\adn0
+ \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
+ \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
+ \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
+ \else
+ \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
+ \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
+ \let\next=\maketoks
+ \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
+ \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
+ \fi
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \next}
+ \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
+ {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
+ \def\pdflink#1{%
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
+ \linkcolor #1\endlink}
+ \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
+\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+% Font-change commands.
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this one.
+\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+
+% Default leading.
+\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+ \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+ \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+ \normalbaselines
+ \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+ \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+ depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+ }%
+}
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+\newcount\mainmagstep
+\ifx\bigger\relax
+ % not really supported.
+ \mainmagstep=\magstep1
+ \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+ \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+\else
+ \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
+ \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+ \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\fi
+% Instead of cmb10, you may want to use cmbx10.
+% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
+% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10
+% (in Bob's opinion).
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
+\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
+\font\smalli=cmmi9
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+
+% Fonts for title page:
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+\def\authortt{\sectt}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
+% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
+% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
+% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+ \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
+ \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
+ \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
+}
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
+% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
+% cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
+% \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
+% redefine \bf itself.
+\def\textfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+ \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+ \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
+\def\titlefonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+ \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+ \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+ \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+ \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+ \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+\def\secfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+ \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+ \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+ \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+ \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\def\smallfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
+ \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
+ \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
+\def\smallerfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
+ \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
+ \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
+ \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
+
+% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
+\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
+
+% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
+% can fit this many characters:
+% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
+% If we use \smallerfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
+% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
+% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
+%
+% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
+% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
+%
+% I wish we used A4 paper on this side of the Atlantic.
+%
+% --karl, 24jan03.
+
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts
+
+% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\var=\smartslanted
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+\let\cite=\smartslanted
+
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
+% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
+%
+\catcode`@=11
+ \def\frenchspacing{%
+ \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
+ \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
+ }
+\catcode`@=\other
+
+\def\t#1{%
+ {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+ \null
+}
+\let\ttfont=\t
+\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\font\keysy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+ \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+ \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+ \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+ \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+ \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+\let\file=\samp
+\let\option=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+ {%
+ % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+ \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+ %
+ % Switch to typewriter.
+ \tt
+ %
+ % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+ \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+ %
+ % Turn off hyphenation.
+ \nohyphenation
+ %
+ \rawbackslash
+ \frenchspacing
+ #1%
+ }%
+ \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+% -- rms.
+{
+ \catcode`\-=\active
+ \catcode`\_=\active
+ %
+ \global\def\code{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
+ \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
+ \codex
+ }
+ %
+ % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
+ % just treat them as a normal -.
+ \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{%
+ % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
+ % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
+ % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
+ % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
+ \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
+ \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
+ \else\normalunderscore \fi
+ \discretionary{}{}{}}%
+ {\_}%
+}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
+\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
+ \def\arg{#1}%
+ \ifx\arg\worddistinct
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+ \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+ \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+ \else
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle `\arg'}%
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is `distinct.'
+\kbdinputstyle distinct
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+
+% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\url=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\command=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
+% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
+% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
+% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
+% a hypertex \special here.
+%
+\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
+\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
+ \unsepspaces
+ \pdfurl{#1}%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+ \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
+ \else
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+ \ifpdf
+ \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
+ \else
+ \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
+%
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\ifpdf
+ \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
+ \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
+ \unsepspaces
+ \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+ \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
+ \endlink
+ \endgroup}
+\else
+ \let\email=\uref
+\fi
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
+
+% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
+\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
+% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
+%
+\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+
+\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
+\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+ \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+ \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+ \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
+ %
+ \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
+ \let\tt=\authortt}%
+ %
+ % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+ \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+ %
+ % Now you can print the title using @title.
+ \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
+ \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
+ % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+ \finishedtitlepagefalse
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
+ % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue
+ %
+ % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
+ \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
+ \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
+ %
+ % @author should come last, but may come many times.
+ \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
+ \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
+ {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
+ %
+ % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+ % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+ \let\oldpage = \page
+ \def\page{%
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+ \finishtitlepage
+ \fi
+ \oldpage
+ \let\page = \oldpage
+ \hbox{}}%
+% \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+ \finishtitlepage
+ \fi
+ % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+ % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+ % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+ % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+ \oldpage
+ \endgroup
+ %
+ % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
+ % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
+ \HEADINGSon
+ %
+ % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+ \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \shortcontents
+ \contents
+ \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+ \global\let\contents = \relax
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \contents
+ \global\let\contents = \relax
+ \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+ \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
+\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
+
+% Now make Tex use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+ \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+ \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what @headings on does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 %
+
+\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+ \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+ %
+ % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
+ % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+ \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
+ \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
+}
+
+\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+%
+}% unbind the catcode of @.
+
+% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off turns them off.
+% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
+% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
+% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
+\ifx\today\undefined
+\def\today{%
+ \number\day\space
+ \ifcase\month
+ \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
+ \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
+ \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
+ \fi
+ \space\number\year}
+\fi
+
+% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
+% It generates no output of its own.
+\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
+\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+
+\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
+ \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
+ \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+ \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+ \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+ \itemindex{#1}%
+ \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+ %
+ % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+ % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+ % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+ % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+ % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+ \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+ %
+ % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+ % but leave it ragged-right.
+ \begingroup
+ \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+ \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+ \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+ \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+ \endgroup
+ %
+ % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+ % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+ \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+ %
+ % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. (Unfortunately
+ % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
+ % \baselineskip glue.) However, if what follows is an environment
+ % such as @example, there will be no \parskip glue; then
+ % the negative vskip we just would cause the example and the item to
+ % crash together. So we use this bizarre value of 10001 as a signal
+ % to \aboveenvbreak to insert \parskip glue after all.
+ % (Possibly there are other commands that could be followed by
+ % @example which need the same treatment, but not section titles; or
+ % maybe section titles are the only special case and they should be
+ % penalty 10001...)
+ \penalty 10001
+ \endgroup
+ \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+ \else
+ % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
+ % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
+ \noindent
+ % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+ % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+ % eventually be printed.
+ \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+ \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+ \unhbox0
+ \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+ \endgroup
+ \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+ \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
+\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
+\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
+\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
+\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
+
+% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
+\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
+
+\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
+\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
+\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\dontindex #1{}
+\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
+\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
+
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
+\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\begingroup %
+\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
+\let\itemindex=#1%
+\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
+\def\itemfont{#2}%
+\itemmax=\tableindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
+\exdentamount=\tableindent
+\parindent = 0pt
+\parskip = \smallskipamount
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\item = \internalBitem %
+\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
+\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
+\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
+\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
+\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+}
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+
+\def\itemizezzz #1{%
+ \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
+ \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+}
+
+\def\itemizey #1#2{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\itemmax=\itemindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
+\exdentamount=\itemindent
+\parindent = 0pt %
+\parskip = \smallskipamount %
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\def\itemcontents{#1}%
+\let\item=\itemizeitem}
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
+\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+ \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
+ %
+ % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+ \def\thearg{#1}%
+ \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+ %
+ % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
+ % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+ % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+ % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+ % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+ \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+ \ifx\rest\empty
+ % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
+ % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+ % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+ % not equal to itself.
+ % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+ %
+ % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+ % continuing to look for a <number>.
+ %
+ \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+ \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+ \else
+ % It's a letter.
+ \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+ \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+ \else
+ \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
+ \numericenumerate
+ \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \thearg
+ \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+ \startenumeration{%
+ % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+ \ifnum\itemno=0
+ \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+ alphabet}%
+ \fi
+ \char\lccode\itemno
+ }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+ \startenumeration{%
+ % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+ \ifnum\itemno=0
+ \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+ alphabet}
+ \fi
+ \char\uccode\itemno
+ }%
+}
+
+% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+ \advance\itemno by -1
+ \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
+
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+\advance\itemno by 1
+{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
+\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
+{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
+\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
+\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
+\flushcr}
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+% @item ...
+%
+% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+% columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+% @item ...
+% using the widest term desired in each column.
+%
+% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
+% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
+% will parse correctly, i.e.,
+%
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
+% template}
+% Not:
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
+% {Column 3 template}
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
+% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+% @item
+% first col stuff
+% @tab
+% second col stuff
+% @tab
+% third col
+% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+% @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+% to baseline.
+% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+%
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+%
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
+% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
+% just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
+% percent of \hsize for this column.
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
+ \global\advance\colcount by 1
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
+ \setuptable
+}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{%
+ \def\firstarg{#1}%
+ \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
+ \let\go = \relax
+ \else
+ \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
+ \global\setpercenttrue
+ \else
+ \ifsetpercent
+ \let\go\pickupwholefraction
+ \else
+ \global\advance\colcount by 1
+ \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
+ % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
+ % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
+ % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
+ \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
+ \else
+ \let\go = \setuptable
+ \fi%
+ \fi
+ \go
+}
+
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+%
+\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
+\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+ \vskip\parskip
+ \let\item=\crcrwithfootnotes
+ % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
+ % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just & until
+ % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. --karl,
+ % nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
+ \let\tab=&%
+ \let\startfootins=\startsavedfootnote
+ \tolerance=9500
+ \hbadness=9500
+ \setmultitablespacing
+ \parskip=\multitableparskip
+ \parindent=\multitableparindent
+ \overfullrule=0pt
+ \global\colcount=0
+ \def\Emultitable{%
+ \global\setpercentfalse
+ \crcrwithfootnotes\crcr
+ \egroup\egroup
+ }%
+ %
+ % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+ \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+ %
+ % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
+ % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
+ % The table preamble
+ % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
+ \everycr{\noalign{%
+ %
+ % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+ % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
+ % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
+ % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+ \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
+ %
+ % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+ % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+ % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+ % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+ \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
+ \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+ %
+ % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+ % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+ % the first one.
+ %
+ % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+ % to the width of each template entry.
+ %
+ % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+ % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+ % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
+ % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+ %
+ % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+ \rightskip=0pt
+ \ifnum\colcount=1
+ % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+ \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+ \else
+ \ifsetpercent \else
+ % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+ % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+ \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+ \fi
+ % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+ \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+ \fi
+ % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+ % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+ % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+ % For example:
+ % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+ % @item @code{#}
+ % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+ % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
+ % characters.
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
+% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
+% current baselineskip.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
+\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
+%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
+%% to keep lines equally spaced
+\let\multistrut = \strut
+\else
+%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
+\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
+width0pt\relax} \fi
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+%% table. If not, do nothing.
+%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+ %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+ %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+% In case a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
+% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is
+% finished. Otherwise, the insertion is lost, it never migrates to the
+% main vertical list. --kasal, 22jan03.
+%
+\newbox\savedfootnotes
+%
+% \dotable \let's \startfootins to this, so that \dofootnote will call
+% it instead of starting the insertion right away.
+\def\startsavedfootnote{%
+ \global\setbox\savedfootnotes = \vbox\bgroup
+ \unvbox\savedfootnotes
+}
+\def\crcrwithfootnotes{%
+ \crcr
+ \ifvoid\savedfootnotes \else
+ \noalign{\insert\footins{\box\savedfootnotes}}%
+ \fi
+}
+
+\message{conditionals,}
+% Prevent errors for section commands.
+% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
+\def\ignoresections{%
+ \let\chapter=\relax
+ \let\unnumbered=\relax
+ \let\top=\relax
+ \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
+ \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
+ \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
+ \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
+ \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
+ \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
+ \let\section=\relax
+ \let\subsec=\relax
+ \let\subsubsec=\relax
+ \let\subsection=\relax
+ \let\subsubsection=\relax
+ \let\appendix=\relax
+ \let\appendixsec=\relax
+ \let\appendixsection=\relax
+ \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
+ \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
+ \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
+ \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
+ \let\contents=\relax
+ \let\smallbook=\relax
+ \let\titlepage=\relax
+}
+
+% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
+% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
+% incorrectly.
+%
+% We use \empty instead of \relax for the @def... commands, so that \end
+% doesn't throw an error. For instance:
+% @ignore
+% @deffn ...
+% @end deffn
+% @end ignore
+%
+% The @end deffn is going to get expanded, because we're trying to allow
+% nested conditionals. But we don't want to expand the actual @deffn,
+% since it might be syntactically correct and intended to be ignored.
+% Since \end checks for \relax, using \empty does not cause an error.
+%
+\def\ignoremorecommands{%
+ \let\defcodeindex = \relax
+ \let\defcv = \empty
+ \let\defcvx = \empty
+ \let\Edefcv = \empty
+ \let\deffn = \empty
+ \let\deffnx = \empty
+ \let\Edeffn = \empty
+ \let\defindex = \relax
+ \let\defivar = \empty
+ \let\defivarx = \empty
+ \let\Edefivar = \empty
+ \let\defmac = \empty
+ \let\defmacx = \empty
+ \let\Edefmac = \empty
+ \let\defmethod = \empty
+ \let\defmethodx = \empty
+ \let\Edefmethod = \empty
+ \let\defop = \empty
+ \let\defopx = \empty
+ \let\Edefop = \empty
+ \let\defopt = \empty
+ \let\defoptx = \empty
+ \let\Edefopt = \empty
+ \let\defspec = \empty
+ \let\defspecx = \empty
+ \let\Edefspec = \empty
+ \let\deftp = \empty
+ \let\deftpx = \empty
+ \let\Edeftp = \empty
+ \let\deftypefn = \empty
+ \let\deftypefnx = \empty
+ \let\Edeftypefn = \empty
+ \let\deftypefun = \empty
+ \let\deftypefunx = \empty
+ \let\Edeftypefun = \empty
+ \let\deftypeivar = \empty
+ \let\deftypeivarx = \empty
+ \let\Edeftypeivar = \empty
+ \let\deftypemethod = \empty
+ \let\deftypemethodx = \empty
+ \let\Edeftypemethod = \empty
+ \let\deftypeop = \empty
+ \let\deftypeopx = \empty
+ \let\Edeftypeop = \empty
+ \let\deftypevar = \empty
+ \let\deftypevarx = \empty
+ \let\Edeftypevar = \empty
+ \let\deftypevr = \empty
+ \let\deftypevrx = \empty
+ \let\Edeftypevr = \empty
+ \let\defun = \empty
+ \let\defunx = \empty
+ \let\Edefun = \empty
+ \let\defvar = \empty
+ \let\defvarx = \empty
+ \let\Edefvar = \empty
+ \let\defvr = \empty
+ \let\defvrx = \empty
+ \let\Edefvr = \empty
+ \let\clear = \relax
+ \let\down = \relax
+ \let\evenfooting = \relax
+ \let\evenheading = \relax
+ \let\everyfooting = \relax
+ \let\everyheading = \relax
+ \let\headings = \relax
+ \let\include = \relax
+ \let\item = \relax
+ \let\lowersections = \relax
+ \let\oddfooting = \relax
+ \let\oddheading = \relax
+ \let\printindex = \relax
+ \let\pxref = \relax
+ \let\raisesections = \relax
+ \let\ref = \relax
+ \let\set = \relax
+ \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
+ \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
+ \let\settitle = \relax
+ \let\up = \relax
+ \let\verbatiminclude = \relax
+ \let\xref = \relax
+}
+
+% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
+%
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+\def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
+\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
+\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory = \comment
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+%
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+ % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+ \ignoresections
+ %
+ % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
+ % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
+ % this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match.
+ \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
+ %
+ % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+ \catcode\spaceChar = 10
+ %
+ % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
+ \catcode`\{ = 9
+ \catcode`\} = 9
+ %
+ % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
+ \catcode`\@ = 12
+ %
+ \def\ignoreword{#1}%
+ \ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
+ % The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
+ % `documentdescription' contains a `c'. Means not everything will
+ % be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
+ \else
+ % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
+ % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
+ % @c @end ifinfo
+ % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
+ % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
+ \catcode`\c = 14
+ \fi
+ %
+ % And now expand the command defined above.
+ \doignoretext
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off ignored text.
+%
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+
+\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
+\def\obstexwarn{%
+ \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
+ % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
+ % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
+ \immediate\write16{}
+ \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
+ \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
+ \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
+ \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
+ \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
+ \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/non-gnu/TeX.README.)}
+ \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
+ \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
+ \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
+ \immediate\write16{}
+ \global\warnedobstrue
+ \fi
+}
+
+% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
+% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
+% uncomment the following line:
+%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
+
+% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
+% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
+%
+\def\nestedignore#1{%
+ \obstexwarn
+ % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
+ % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
+ % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
+ % the chance of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
+ % page 401 of the TeXbook.
+ %
+ \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
+ % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+ \ignoresections
+ %
+ % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
+ % @end command again.
+ \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+ %
+ % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
+ % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
+ % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
+ % undefine them.
+ %
+ % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
+ % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
+ \ignoremorecommands
+ %
+ % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
+ % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
+ % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because some sites
+ % might not have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
+ % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
+ % stuff compared to the main input.
+ %
+ \nullfont
+ \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
+ \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
+ \let\tensf=\nullfont
+ % Similarly for index fonts.
+ \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
+ \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
+ \let\smallsf=\nullfont
+ % Similarly for smallexample fonts.
+ \let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
+ \let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
+ \let\smallersf=\nullfont
+ %
+ % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
+ \tracinglostchars = 0
+ %
+ % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
+ \frenchspacing
+ %
+ % Don't report underfull hboxes.
+ \hbadness = 10000
+ %
+ % Do minimal line-breaking.
+ \pretolerance = 10000
+ %
+ % Do not execute instructions in @tex.
+ \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
+ % Do not execute macro definitions.
+ % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
+ \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
+}
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
+% losing inside @example, for instance.
+%
+\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
+ \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
+ \parsearg\setxxx}
+\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+ \def\temp{#2}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
+ \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
+% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
+% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
+\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
+\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+{
+ \catcode`\_ = \active
+ %
+ % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
+ % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any
+ % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
+ \gdef\value{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
+ \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
+ \valuexxx}
+}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones
+% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
+% about that. The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable
+% is set), since the result winds up in the index file. This means that
+% if the variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost
+% certain it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with
+% sufficient work to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of
+% complete).
+%
+\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+ {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+ \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
+ \else
+ \csname SET#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+\def\ifset{\parsearg\doifset}
+\def\doifset#1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+ \let\next=\ifsetfail
+ \else
+ \let\next=\ifsetsucceed
+ \fi
+ \next
+}
+\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg\doifclear}
+\def\doifclear#1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+ \let\next=\ifclearsucceed
+ \else
+ \let\next=\ifclearfail
+ \fi
+ \next
+}
+\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
+% read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make
+% `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
+%
+\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
+\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
+\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
+\def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
+\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
+
+% True conditional. Since \set globally defines its variables, we can
+% just start and end a group (to keep the @end definition undefined at
+% the outer level).
+%
+\def\conditionalsucceed#1{\begingroup
+ \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\endgroup}%
+}
+
+% @defininfoenclose.
+\let\definfoenclose=\comment
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+%
+\def\newindex#1{%
+ \iflinks
+ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+ \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
+ \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
+%
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+%
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+%
+\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+ \iflinks
+ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+ \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+ \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+%
+% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+%
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
+
+% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
+% #3 the target index (bar).
+\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
+ % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
+ % closing the target index.
+ \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
+ % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+ % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+ \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
+ \fi
+ % redefine \fooindfile:
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
+ % redefine \fooindex:
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
+% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
+% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
+%
+\def\indexdummies{%
+ \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
+ \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
+ % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+ % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+ % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
+ \let\{ = \mylbrace
+ \let\} = \myrbrace
+ %
+ % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
+ % effectively preventing its expansion. This is used only for control
+ % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
+ % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
+ % from whatever follows.
+ %
+ % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
+ % space.
+ %
+ % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
+ % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
+ % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
+ %
+ \def\definedummyword##1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
+ }%
+ \def\definedummyletter##1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
+ }%
+ %
+ % Do the redefinitions.
+ \commondummies
+}
+
+% For the aux file, @ is the escape character. So we want to redefine
+% everything using @ instead of \realbackslash. When everything uses
+% @, this will be simpler.
+%
+\def\atdummies{%
+ \def\@{@@}%
+ \def\ {@ }%
+ \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
+ \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
+ %
+ % (See comments in \indexdummies.)
+ \def\definedummyword##1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
+ }%
+ \def\definedummyletter##1{%
+ \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
+ }%
+ %
+ % Do the redefinitions.
+ \commondummies
+}
+
+% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. \definedummyword and
+% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
+%
+\def\commondummies{%
+ %
+ \normalturnoffactive
+ %
+ % Control letters and accents.
+ \definedummyletter{_}%
+ \definedummyletter{,}%
+ \definedummyletter{"}%
+ \definedummyletter{`}%
+ \definedummyletter{'}%
+ \definedummyletter{^}%
+ \definedummyletter{~}%
+ \definedummyletter{=}%
+ \definedummyword{u}%
+ \definedummyword{v}%
+ \definedummyword{H}%
+ \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
+ \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
+ \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
+ \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
+ \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
+ \definedummyword{dotless}%
+ %
+ % Other non-English letters.
+ \definedummyword{AA}%
+ \definedummyword{AE}%
+ \definedummyword{L}%
+ \definedummyword{OE}%
+ \definedummyword{O}%
+ \definedummyword{aa}%
+ \definedummyword{ae}%
+ \definedummyword{l}%
+ \definedummyword{oe}%
+ \definedummyword{o}%
+ \definedummyword{ss}%
+ %
+ % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
+ \definedummyword{bf}%
+ \definedummyword{gtr}%
+ \definedummyword{hat}%
+ \definedummyword{less}%
+ \definedummyword{sf}%
+ \definedummyword{sl}%
+ \definedummyword{tclose}%
+ \definedummyword{tt}%
+ %
+ % Texinfo font commands.
+ \definedummyword{b}%
+ \definedummyword{i}%
+ \definedummyword{r}%
+ \definedummyword{sc}%
+ \definedummyword{t}%
+ %
+ \definedummyword{TeX}%
+ \definedummyword{acronym}%
+ \definedummyword{cite}%
+ \definedummyword{code}%
+ \definedummyword{command}%
+ \definedummyword{dfn}%
+ \definedummyword{dots}%
+ \definedummyword{emph}%
+ \definedummyword{env}%
+ \definedummyword{file}%
+ \definedummyword{kbd}%
+ \definedummyword{key}%
+ \definedummyword{math}%
+ \definedummyword{option}%
+ \definedummyword{samp}%
+ \definedummyword{strong}%
+ \definedummyword{uref}%
+ \definedummyword{url}%
+ \definedummyword{var}%
+ \definedummyword{w}%
+ %
+ % Assorted special characters.
+ \definedummyword{bullet}%
+ \definedummyword{copyright}%
+ \definedummyword{dots}%
+ \definedummyword{enddots}%
+ \definedummyword{equiv}%
+ \definedummyword{error}%
+ \definedummyword{expansion}%
+ \definedummyword{minus}%
+ \definedummyword{pounds}%
+ \definedummyword{point}%
+ \definedummyword{print}%
+ \definedummyword{result}%
+ %
+ % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
+ % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
+ % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+ \let\value = \expandablevalue
+ %
+ % Normal spaces, not active ones.
+ \unsepspaces
+ %
+ % No macro expansion.
+ \turnoffmacros
+}
+
+% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+{\obeyspaces
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
+
+
+% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
+% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
+% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
+% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
+%
+\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
+\def\indexdummydots{...}
+%
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+ \def\ { }%
+ \def\@{@}%
+ % how to handle braces?
+ \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
+ %
+ \let\,=\asis
+ \let\"=\asis
+ \let\`=\asis
+ \let\'=\asis
+ \let\^=\asis
+ \let\~=\asis
+ \let\==\asis
+ \let\u=\asis
+ \let\v=\asis
+ \let\H=\asis
+ \let\dotaccent=\asis
+ \let\ringaccent=\asis
+ \let\tieaccent=\asis
+ \let\ubaraccent=\asis
+ \let\udotaccent=\asis
+ \let\dotless=\asis
+ %
+ % Other non-English letters.
+ \def\AA{AA}%
+ \def\AE{AE}%
+ \def\L{L}%
+ \def\OE{OE}%
+ \def\O{O}%
+ \def\aa{aa}%
+ \def\ae{ae}%
+ \def\l{l}%
+ \def\oe{oe}%
+ \def\o{o}%
+ \def\ss{ss}%
+ \def\exclamdown{!}%
+ \def\questiondown{?}%
+ %
+ % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+ % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
+ % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
+ %\let\tt=\asis
+ %
+ % Texinfo font commands.
+ \let\b=\asis
+ \let\i=\asis
+ \let\r=\asis
+ \let\sc=\asis
+ \let\t=\asis
+ %
+ \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
+ \let\acronym=\asis
+ \let\cite=\asis
+ \let\code=\asis
+ \let\command=\asis
+ \let\dfn=\asis
+ \let\dots=\indexdummydots
+ \let\emph=\asis
+ \let\env=\asis
+ \let\file=\asis
+ \let\kbd=\asis
+ \let\key=\asis
+ \let\math=\asis
+ \let\option=\asis
+ \let\samp=\asis
+ \let\strong=\asis
+ \let\uref=\asis
+ \let\url=\asis
+ \let\var=\asis
+ \let\w=\asis
+}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+
+% For \ifx comparisons.
+\def\emptymacro{\empty}
+
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+%
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
+
+% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception
+% is with defuns, which call us directly.
+%
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+ % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+ \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+ \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+ \fi
+ {%
+ \count255=\lastpenalty
+ {%
+ \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+ \escapechar=`\\
+ {%
+ \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
+ \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+ % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+ %
+ % The main index entry text.
+ \toks0 = {#2}%
+ %
+ % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
+ \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+ \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
+ % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
+ % line to write.
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
+ % get the string to sort by.
+ {\indexnofonts
+ \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
+ \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
+ }%
+ %
+ % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
+ % the original text, including any font commands. We write
+ % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
+ % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
+ % sorted result.
+ \edef\temp{%
+ \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+ \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+ }%
+ %
+ % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+ % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+ % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+ % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
+ % like this:
+ % @end defun
+ % @tindex whatever
+ % @defun ...
+ % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+ % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+ % the previous defun.
+ %
+ % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
+ % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+ %
+ % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+ %
+ \iflinks
+ \ifvmode
+ \skip0 = \lastskip
+ \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\skip0 \fi
+ \fi
+ %
+ \temp % do the write
+ %
+ \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ \penalty\count255
+ }%
+}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+% \initial {c}
+% before the first topic whose initial is c
+% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+% for a topic that is used without subtopics
+% \primary {topic}
+% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+% for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
+\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+ \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+ %
+ \smallfonts \rm
+ \tolerance = 9500
+ \indexbreaks
+ %
+ % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+ % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+ % \initial {@}
+ % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+ % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+ \catcode`\@ = 11
+ \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+ \ifeof 1
+ % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+ % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+ % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+ % there is some text.
+ \putwordIndexNonexistent
+ \else
+ %
+ % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+ % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+ % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+ \read 1 to \temp
+ \ifeof 1
+ \putwordIndexIsEmpty
+ \else
+ % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+ % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+ % to make right now.
+ \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+ \catcode`\\ = 0
+ \escapechar = `\\
+ \begindoublecolumns
+ \input \jobname.#1s
+ \enddoublecolumns
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+\def\initial#1{{%
+ % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
+ \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+ %
+ % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+ \removelastskip
+ %
+ % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+ \penalty -300
+ %
+ % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
+ % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+ % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+ % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+ %
+ % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+ \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
+ \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+ \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+ %
+ % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+ \nobreak
+}}
+
+% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
+% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
+% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
+ %
+ % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+ % affect previous text.
+ \par
+ %
+ % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+ \parfillskip = 0in
+ %
+ % No extra space above this paragraph.
+ \parskip = 0in
+ %
+ % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+ \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+ %
+ % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+ % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
+ % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
+ % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+ % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+ %
+ % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+ % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+ \hangindent = 2em
+ %
+ % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+ % with blank space.
+ \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+ %
+ % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
+ \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+ %
+ % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
+ % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
+ \noindent
+ %
+ % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
+ #1%
+ % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+ % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
+ % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+ \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+ \def\tempb{#2}%
+ \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+ \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+ \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+ %
+ % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+ % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+ % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+ \hfil\penalty50
+ \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+ %
+ % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+ % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
+ % \hbox ensues.
+ \ifpdf
+ \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+ \else
+ \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+ \fi
+ \fi%
+ \par
+\endgroup}
+
+% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+ \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+\def\secondary#1#2{{%
+ \parfillskip=0in
+ \parskip=0in
+ \hangindent=1in
+ \hangafter=1
+ \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
+ \ifpdf
+ \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+ \else
+ #2
+ \fi
+ \par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+ % Grab any single-column material above us.
+ \output = {%
+ %
+ % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+ % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+ % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+ % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
+ % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
+ % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
+ % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
+ \ifvoid\partialpage \else
+ \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+ % Unvbox the main output page.
+ \unvbox\PAGE
+ \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+ }%
+ }%
+ \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
+ %
+ % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+ \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+ %
+ % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
+ % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+ % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
+ % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+ % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+ %
+ % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+ % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+ % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
+ % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+ % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+ %
+ % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+ % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+ % been clobbered.
+ %
+ \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+ \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+ \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+ \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+ %
+ % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
+ % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+ \vsize = 2\vsize
+}
+
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+% the last.
+%
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+ \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+ % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+ % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+ % previous page.
+ \dimen@ = \vsize
+ \divide\dimen@ by 2
+ \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
+ %
+ % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+ \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+ \onepageout\pagesofar
+ \unvbox255
+ \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+%
+% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+\def\pagesofar{%
+ \unvbox\partialpage
+ %
+ \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+ \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+ \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+%
+% All done with double columns.
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+ \output = {%
+ % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
+ % current page, no automatic page break.
+ \balancecolumns
+ %
+ % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
+ % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
+ % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+ % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+ % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
+ % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
+ % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+ \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+ }%
+ \eject
+ \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+ %
+ % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+ % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
+ % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
+ % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
+ \pagegoal = \vsize
+}
+%
+% Called at the end of the double column material.
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+ \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+ \dimen@ = \ht0
+ \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+ \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+ \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+ %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
+ \splittopskip = \topskip
+ % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+ {%
+ \vbadness = 10000
+ \loop
+ \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+ \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+ \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
+ \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+ \repeat
+ }%
+ %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
+ \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+ \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+ %
+ \pagesofar
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Chapters, sections, etc.
+
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
+% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
+\def\appendixletter{%
+ \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
+ % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
+ % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
+ % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
+ % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
+ \else\char\the\appendixno
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+
+% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
+% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
+\def\thischapter{}
+\def\thissection{}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% Choose a numbered-heading macro
+% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
+% #2 is text for heading
+\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+ \chapterzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \seczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+ \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+ \chapterzzz{#2}
+ \else
+ \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
+\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+ \appendixzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+ \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+ \appendixzzz{#2}
+ \else
+ \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
+\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+ \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+\or
+ \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+ \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+ \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+ \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+ \else
+ \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
+\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
+\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
+\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz #1{%
+ \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+ \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+ \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+ \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+ % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+ % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
+ \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+ \writetocentry{chap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
+ \donoderef
+ \global\let\section = \numberedsec
+ \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% we use \chapno to avoid indenting back
+\def\appendixbox#1{%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} \the\chapno}%
+ \hbox to \wd0{#1\hss}}
+
+\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
+\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz #1{%
+ \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+ \global\advance \appendixno by 1
+ \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+ \chapmacro {#1}{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}%
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}%
+ \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+ \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+ \writetocentry{appendix}{#1}{{\appendixletter}}
+ \appendixnoderef
+ \global\let\section = \appendixsec
+ \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
+\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+
+\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
+ \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+ %
+ % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+ % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+ % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+ % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+ % to be executed, not expanded).
+ %
+ % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+ % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
+ % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+ % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
+ % the toc entries.)
+ \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
+ %
+ \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
+ \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+ \writetocentry{unnumbchap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
+ \unnumbnoderef
+ \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+ \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% Sections.
+\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
+\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz #1{%
+ \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
+ \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
+ \donoderef
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
+ \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
+ \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}
+ \appendixnoderef
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
+ \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+ \writetocentry{unnumbsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
+ \unnumbnoderef
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+ \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+ \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
+ \donoderef
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+ \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+ \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
+ \appendixnoderef
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
+ \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+ \writetocentry{unnumbsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
+ \unnumbnoderef
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsubsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+ \subsubsecheading {#1}
+ {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+ \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
+ \donoderef
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
+ \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+ \subsubsecheading {#1}
+ {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+ \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
+ \appendixnoderef
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+ \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+ \writetocentry{unnumbsubsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
+ \unnumbnoderef
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
+% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
+\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
+\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
+\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
+% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+% overlong headings to fold.
+% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
+
+
+\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
+\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
+ {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+ {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
+ {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
+\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
+\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+\def\CHAPFplain{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
+
+% Plain chapter opening.
+% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
+\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+ \pchapsepmacro
+ {%
+ \chapfonts \rm
+ \def\chapnum{#2}%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+ \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+ \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+ \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+ }%
+ \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+% Plain opening for unnumbered.
+\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
+ \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
+ \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+ \leftskip = \rightskip
+ \parfillskip = 0pt
+ }%
+ \chfplain{#1}{}%
+}}
+
+\CHAPFplain % The default
+
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+
+\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt
+ \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\CHAPFopen{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+
+
+% Section titles.
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
+\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
+\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip \subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
+\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
+\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
+\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+
+
+% Print any size section title.
+%
+% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
+% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
+ {%
+ \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
+ \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
+ }%
+ {%
+ % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+ \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+ %
+ % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
+ \def\secnum{#2}%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+ %
+ \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+ \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
+ \unhbox0 #3}%
+ }%
+ % Add extra space after the heading -- either a line space or a
+ % paragraph space, whichever is more. (Some people like to set
+ % \parskip to large values for some reason.) Don't allow stretch, though.
+ \nobreak
+ \ifdim\parskip>\normalbaselineskip
+ \kern\parskip
+ \else
+ \kern\normalbaselineskip
+ \fi
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+
+\message{toc,}
+% Table of contents.
+\newwrite\tocfile
+
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+% Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the
+% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
+%
+% Usage: \writetocentry{chap}{The Name of The Game}{{\the\chapno}}
+% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
+% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
+%
+\newif\iftocfileopened
+\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
+ \iftocfileopened\else
+ \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+ \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+ \fi
+ %
+ \iflinks
+ \toks0 = {#2}%
+ \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}#3{\folio}}}%
+ \temp
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
+ % will be the target of the links in the table of contents. We can't
+ % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
+ % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
+ % of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
+ % two named `2'.
+ \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
+% to \tocfile.
+%
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+ % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+ % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
+ % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+ % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+ \contentsalignmacro
+ \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+ %
+ % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+ % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+ \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
+ \savepageno = \pageno
+ \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+ \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
+ % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
+ % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
+ %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
+ \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+ \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+ %
+ % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+ \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\def\contents{%
+ \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+ \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \closein 1
+ \input \jobname.toc
+ \fi
+ \vfill \eject
+ \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+ \pdfmakeoutlines
+ \endgroup
+ \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+ \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+ \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+ %
+ \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
+ \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
+ \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
+ % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+ \secfonts
+ \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+ \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+ \rm
+ \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+ \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+ \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
+ \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
+ \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
+ \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
+ \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
+ \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
+ \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \closein 1
+ \input \jobname.toc
+ \fi
+ \vfill \eject
+ \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+ \endgroup
+ \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+ \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+\ifpdf
+ \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
+\fi
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapters, in the main contents.
+\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+%
+% Chapters, in the short toc.
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
+ \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
+}
+
+% Appendices, in the main contents.
+\def\appendixentry#1#2#3{%
+ \dochapentry{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} #2}\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+%
+% Appendices, in the short toc.
+\let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
+% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
+% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+%
+\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+ % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+ % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+ % But use \hss just in case.
+ % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+ % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+ \dimen0 = 1em
+ \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
+}
+
+% Unnumbered chapters.
+\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#1}{#3}}
+\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2#3{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
+\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
+\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#6}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+ \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+ \begingroup
+ \chapentryfonts
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+ \endgroup
+ \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
+% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
+% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
+% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
+\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
+ % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
+ % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
+ % have to do the usual translation tricks.
+ \entry{#1}{#2}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+% @foo ... @end foo.
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+%
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+%
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+%
+\newbox\errorbox
+%
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+%
+\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+ \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+ \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+ \vbox{
+ \hrule height\dimen2
+ \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
+ \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+ \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+ \hrule height\dimen2}
+ \hfil}
+%
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\def\tex{\begingroup
+ \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+ \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+ \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
+ \catcode `\%=14
+ \catcode `\+=\other
+ \catcode `\"=\other
+ \catcode `\==\other
+ \catcode `\|=\other
+ \catcode `\<=\other
+ \catcode `\>=\other
+ \escapechar=`\\
+ %
+ \let\b=\ptexb
+ \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+ \let\c=\ptexc
+ \let\,=\ptexcomma
+ \let\.=\ptexdot
+ \let\dots=\ptexdots
+ \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+ \let\!=\ptexexclam
+ \let\i=\ptexi
+ \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+ \let\+=\tabalign
+ \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+ \let\*=\ptexstar
+ \let\t=\ptext
+ %
+ \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+ \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+ \def\@{@}%
+\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+
+% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
+% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+% should produce a line of output anyway.
+%
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
+
+% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
+% for use in \parsearg.
+{\sepspaces%
+\global\let\obeyedspace= }
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
+ % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz, q.v.
+ \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
+ \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+ \endgraf
+ \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+ \removelastskip
+ % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
+ % or better ...
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \else \penalty-50 \fi
+ \vskip\envskipamount
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+% environment contents.
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+ \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+ \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+ \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+ \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\def\cartouche{%
+\par % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
+\begingroup
+ \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+ \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
+ \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+ \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+ \cartouter=\hsize
+ \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+% side, and for 6pt waste from
+% each corner char, and rule thickness
+ \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+ % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+ \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+ \carttop
+ \hbox\bgroup
+ \hskip\lskip
+ \vrule\kern3pt
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \hsize=\cartinner
+ \kern3pt
+ \begingroup
+ \baselineskip=\normbskip
+ \lineskip=\normlskip
+ \parskip=\normpskip
+ \vskip -\parskip
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+ \endgroup
+ \kern3pt
+ \egroup
+ \kern3pt\vrule
+ \hskip\rskip
+ \egroup
+ \cartbot
+ \egroup
+\endgroup
+}}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+ \aboveenvbreak
+ \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
+ \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+ \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+ \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+ \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+ \parskip = 0pt
+ \parindent = 0pt
+ \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+ % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+ % at next level down.
+ \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+ \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+ \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+ \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+ \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
+% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
+%
+% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
+% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep
+% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
+% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
+% the environment.
+%
+\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
+
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
+\def\lisp{\begingroup
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
+ \tt
+ \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+ \gobble % eat return
+}
+
+% @example: Same as @lisp.
+\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+\def\smalllisp{\begingroup
+ \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+ \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+ \smallexamplefonts
+ \lisp
+}
+\let\smallexample = \smalllisp
+
+
+% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+%
+\def\display{\begingroup
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
+ \gobble
+}
+%
+% @smalldisplay: @display plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup
+ \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+ \smallexamplefonts \rm
+ \display
+}
+
+% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\def\format{\begingroup
+ \let\nonarrowing = t
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
+ \gobble
+}
+%
+% @smallformat: @format plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smallformat{\begingroup
+ \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+ \smallexamplefonts \rm
+ \format
+}
+
+% @flushleft (same as @format).
+%
+\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+
+% @flushright.
+%
+\def\flushright{\begingroup
+ \let\nonarrowing = t
+ \nonfillstart
+ \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
+ \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+ \gobble
+}
+
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.
+%
+\def\quotation{%
+ \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+ {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+ \parindent=0pt
+ % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+ % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
+ \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
+ %
+ % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+ \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+ \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+ \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+ \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+ \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
+% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
+% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
+% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
+%
+% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
+%
+% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
+% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
+% verbatim line.
+\def\dospecials{%
+ \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+ \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
+ \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
+}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 380
+\def\uncatcodespecials{%
+ \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
+%
+% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
+% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
+\endgroup
+%
+% Setup for the @verb command.
+%
+% Eight spaces for a tab
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^I=\active
+ \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\setupverb{%
+ \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+ \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
+ \catcode`\`=\active
+ \tabeightspaces
+ % Respect line breaks,
+ % print special symbols as themselves, and
+ % make each space count
+ % must do in this order:
+ \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+}
+
+% Setup for the @verbatim environment
+%
+% Real tab expansion
+\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
+%
+\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^I=\active
+ \gdef\tabexpand{%
+ \catcode`\^^I=\active
+ \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
+ \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
+ \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
+ \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
+ \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
+ \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
+ }%
+ }
+\endgroup
+\def\setupverbatim{%
+ % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+ \tt
+ \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
+ \catcode`\`=\active
+ \tabexpand
+ % Respect line breaks,
+ % print special symbols as themselves, and
+ % make each space count
+ % must do in this order:
+ \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+ \everypar{\starttabbox}%
+}
+
+% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
+% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
+% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
+%
+% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
+ \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
+%
+%
+% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
+% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
+%
+% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
+%
+% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
+% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
+% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
+%
+% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
+%% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
+%% \begingroup
+%% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
+%% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
+%% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
+%% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
+%% |endgroup
+%
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\ =\active
+ \obeylines %
+ % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
+ % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
+ % line in the output.
+ \gdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\end{verbatim}}%
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\verbatim{%
+ \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+ \begingroup
+ \nonfillstart
+ \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+ \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
+}
+
+% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
+%
+% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\verbatiminclude{%
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+ \catcode`~=\other
+ \catcode`^=\other
+ \catcode`_=\other
+ \catcode`|=\other
+ \catcode`<=\other
+ \catcode`>=\other
+ \catcode`+=\other
+ \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
+}
+\def\setupverbatiminclude{%
+ \begingroup
+ \nonfillstart
+ \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+ \begingroup\setupverbatim
+}
+%
+\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
+ % Restore active chars for included file.
+ \endgroup
+ \begingroup
+ \let\value=\expandablevalue
+ \def\thisfile{#1}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
+ \endgroup
+ \nonfillfinish
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% @copying ... @end copying.
+% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. Many commands won't be
+% allowed in this context, but that's ok.
+%
+% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
+% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
+% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
+% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
+% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
+% possible is very desirable.
+%
+\def\copying{\begingroup
+ % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end copying'.
+ % \ is the escape char in this texinfo.tex file, so it is the
+ % delimiter for the command; @ will be the escape char when we read
+ % it, but that doesn't matter.
+ \long\def\docopying##1\end copying{\gdef\copyingtext{##1}\enddocopying}%
+ %
+ % We must preserve ^^M's in the input file; see \insertcopying below.
+ \catcode`\^^M = \active
+ \docopying
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off the copying text.
+%
+\def\enddocopying{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
+
+% @insertcopying. Here we must play games with ^^M's. On the one hand,
+% we need them to delimit commands such as `@end quotation', so they
+% must be active. On the other hand, we certainly don't want every
+% end-of-line to be a \par, as would happen with the normal active
+% definition of ^^M. On the third hand, two ^^M's in a row should still
+% generate a \par.
+%
+% Our approach is to make ^^M insert a space and a penalty1 normally;
+% then it can also check if \lastpenalty=1. If it does, then manually
+% do \par.
+%
+% This messes up the normal definitions of @c[omment], so we redefine
+% it. Similarly for @ignore. (These commands are used in the gcc
+% manual for man page generation.)
+%
+% Seems pretty fragile, most line-oriented commands will presumably
+% fail, but for the limited use of getting the copying text (which
+% should be quite simple) inserted, we can hope it's ok.
+%
+{\catcode`\^^M=\active %
+\gdef\insertcopying{\begingroup %
+ \parindent = 0pt % looks wrong on title page
+ \def^^M{%
+ \ifnum \lastpenalty=1 %
+ \par %
+ \else %
+ \space \penalty 1 %
+ \fi %
+ }%
+ %
+ % Fix @c[omment] for catcode 13 ^^M's.
+ \def\c##1^^M{\ignorespaces}%
+ \let\comment = \c %
+ %
+ % Don't bother jumping through all the hoops that \doignore does, it
+ % would be very hard since the catcodes are already set.
+ \long\def\ignore##1\end ignore{\ignorespaces}%
+ %
+ \copyingtext %
+\endgroup}%
+}
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% @defun etc.
+
+% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
+\def\setdeffont#1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+\newcount\parencount
+
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
+%
+\def\activeparens{%
+ \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
+ \catcode`\&=\active
+ \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
+}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+
+\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
+\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+% This is used to turn on special parens
+% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
+\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
+
+% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
+% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
+\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
+ \global\advance\parencount by 1
+}
+%
+% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
+\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
+ % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
+ \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
+ \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
+%
+\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
+} % End of definition inside \activeparens
+%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
+%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
+\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
+\let\ampnr = \&
+\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
+\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
+
+% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
+{
+ \catcode`& = \active
+ \global\let& = \ampnr
+}
+
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+% #1 is the function name.
+% #2 is the type of definition, such as "Function".
+%
+\def\defname#1#2{%
+ % How we'll output the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
+ % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+ % just below it.
+ \ifempty{#2}%
+ \def\defnametype{}%
+ \else
+ \def\defnametype{[\rm #2]}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+ \dimen2=\leftskip
+ \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
+ %
+ % Figure out values for the paragraph shape.
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\defnametype}}%
+ \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
+ \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent % size for continuations
+ \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
+ %
+ % Output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) but stuck inside a box of
+ % width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking.
+ \noindent
+ %
+ {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
+ % so that \rightline will obey them.
+ \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
+ \dimen3 = 0pt % was -1.25pc
+ \rlap{\rightline{\defnametype\kern\dimen3}}%
+ }%
+ %
+ % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+ \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+ \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+ \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+ {\df #1}\enskip % output function name
+ % \defunargs will be called next to output the arguments, if any.
+}
+
+% Common pieces to start any @def...
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).
+% #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.
+%
+\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup\inENV
+ % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+ % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+ % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we want to allow a
+ % break after all. Check for penalty 10002 (inserted by
+ % \defargscommonending) instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+ % commands insert a \penalty10000, and we don't want to allow a break
+ % between a section heading and a defun.
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty0 \fi
+ \medbreak
+ %
+ % Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies
+ % so that it will exit this group.
+ \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+ %
+ \parindent=0in
+ \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+ \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+}
+
+% Common part of the \...x definitions.
+%
+\def\defxbodycommon{%
+ % As with \parsebodycommon above, allow line break if we have multiple
+ % x headers in a row. It's not a great place, though.
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty=10000 \penalty1000 \fi
+ %
+ \begingroup\obeylines
+}
+
+% Process body of @defun, @deffn, @defmac, etc.
+%
+\def\defparsebody#1#2#3{%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def#2{\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit#3}%
+ \catcode\equalChar=\active
+ \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+ \spacesplit#3%
+}
+
+% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \parsebodycommon above).
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+%
+\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+ \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+ % The \empty here prevents misinterpretation of a construct such as
+ % @deffn {whatever} {Enharmonic comma}
+ % See comments at \deftpparsebody, although in our case we don't have
+ % to remove the \empty afterwards, since it is empty.
+ \spacesplit{#3{#4}}\empty
+}
+
+% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
+% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
+% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
+% #5 is the method's return type.
+%
+\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def#2##1 ##2 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
+ \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+ \spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}%
+}
+
+% Used for @deftypeop. The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
+% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
+% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'. We have
+% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
+% input at hand. Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
+% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
+%
+\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {\def#4{##1}%
+ \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
+ \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+ \spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}%
+}
+
+% For @defop.
+\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+ \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+ \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
+ \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
+}
+
+% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
+% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
+% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
+%
+\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def#2{\defxbodycommon \spacesplit#3}%
+ \catcode\equalChar=\active
+ \begingroup\obeylines
+ \spacesplit#3%
+}
+
+% @defopvar.
+\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+ \defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+ \begingroup\obeylines
+ \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
+}
+
+\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+ \begingroup\obeylines
+ \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+}
+
+% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
+% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
+% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
+% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+%
+% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
+% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
+% won't strip off the braces.
+%
+\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
+ \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+ \begingroup\obeylines
+ \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+}
+
+% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
+% braces (if any). That's what this does.
+%
+\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
+
+% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
+% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
+% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+%
+\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
+ #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
+}%
+
+% Split up #2 (the rest of the input line) at the first space token.
+% call #1 with two arguments:
+% the first is all of #2 before the space token,
+% the second is all of #2 after that space token.
+% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
+% and the second is passed as empty.
+%
+{\obeylines %
+ \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitx{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitx}%
+ \long\gdef\spacesplitx#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitx{%
+ \ifx\relax #3%
+ #1{#2}{}%
+ \else %
+ #1{#2}{#3#4}%
+ \fi}%
+}
+
+% Define @defun.
+
+% This is called to end the arguments processing for all the @def... commands.
+%
+\def\defargscommonending{%
+ \interlinepenalty = 10000
+ \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+ \endgraf
+ \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+ \penalty 10002 % signal to \parsebodycommon.
+}
+
+% This expands the args and terminates the paragraph they comprise.
+%
+\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
+{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
+#1%
+{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
+\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
+ \defargscommonending
+}
+
+\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
+\boldbraxnoamp
+\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
+ \defargscommonending
+}
+
+% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+
+% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+
+\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+
+\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defun == @deffn Function
+
+\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+
+\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
+% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
+\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
+\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+
+% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
+% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
+\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+
+% #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
+% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup
+\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
+% at least some C++ text from working
+\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
+\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+
+\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+
+\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
+
+\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+
+\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
+%
+\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
+\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+%
+\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% function index entry
+ \begingroup
+ \defname{#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
+ \defunargs{#3}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
+%
+\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
+ \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
+ \deftypeopcategory}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+ \begingroup
+ \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
+ {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
+ \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
+%
+\def\deftypemethod{%
+ \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+ \begingroup
+ \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+ \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
+%
+\def\deftypeivar{%
+ \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
+\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
+ \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
+ \begingroup
+ \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
+ {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
+ \defvarargs{#3}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defmethod == @defop Method
+%
+\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
+\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+ \begingroup
+ \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+ \defunargs{#3}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+
+\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
+\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+
+\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
+ \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% variable index entry
+ \begingroup
+ \defname{#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
+ \defvarargs{#3}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
+%
+\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
+%
+\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
+ \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in var index
+ \begingroup
+ \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
+ \defvarargs{#3}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defvar
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
+% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
+% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
+ \defargscommonending
+}
+
+% @defvr Counter foo-count
+
+\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
+
+\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% @defvar == @defvr Variable
+
+\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
+
+\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
+
+\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
+
+\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypevar int foobar
+
+\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
+% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
+\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
+\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
+ \defargscommonending
+\endgroup}
+\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
+
+\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
+
+\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
+ \defargscommonending
+\endgroup}
+
+% Now define @deftp
+% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
+
+\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
+
+% @deftp Class window height width ...
+
+\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
+
+\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
+%
+\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
+\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
+\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
+\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
+\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
+\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+ \newwrite\macscribble
+ \def\scanmacro#1{%
+ \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+ % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+ \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
+ % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+ \toks0={#1\endinput}%
+ \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+ \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+ \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+ \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+ \input \jobname.tmp
+ \endgroup
+}
+\else
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
+\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
+\fi
+
+\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
+\def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form
+ % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
+
+% Utility routines.
+% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\expandafter\let
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\csname#1\endcsname
+\csname#2\endcsname}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
+% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+ \catcode`\~=\other
+ \catcode`\^=\other
+ \catcode`\_=\other
+ \catcode`\|=\other
+ \catcode`\<=\other
+ \catcode`\>=\other
+ \catcode`\+=\other
+ \catcode`\{=\other
+ \catcode`\}=\other
+ \catcode`\@=\other
+ \catcode`\^^M=\other
+ \usembodybackslash}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+ \catcode`\~=\other
+ \catcode`\^=\other
+ \catcode`\_=\other
+ \catcode`\|=\other
+ \catcode`\<=\other
+ \catcode`\>=\other
+ \catcode`\+=\other
+ \catcode`\@=\other
+ \catcode`\\=\other}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+ \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+ \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
+ \paramno=0%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+ \fi
+ \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
+ \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
+ \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
+ \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
+ % Add the macroname to \macrolist
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
+ \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+ \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+ \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
+ \fi}
+
+\def\unmacro{\parsearg\dounmacro}
+\def\dounmacro#1{%
+ \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
+ \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+ \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
+ % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
+ \let\do\unmacrodo
+ \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
+% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
+%
+\def\unmacrodo#1{%
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ % remove this
+ \else
+ \noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+
+% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+%
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+% the macro is used.
+
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+ \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+ \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+ \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+ \advance\paramno by 1%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+ {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+ \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+ \fi\next}
+
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+
+\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+\def\defmacro{%
+ \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+ \ifrecursive
+ \ifcase\paramno
+ % 0
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+ \or % 1
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \noexpand\braceorline
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+ \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+ \else % many
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\xdef
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+ \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifcase\paramno
+ % 0
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+ \or % 1
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \noexpand\braceorline
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+ \egroup
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+ \else % many
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\xdef
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+ \paramlist{%
+ \egroup
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+ \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+ \expandafter\parsearg
+ \fi \next}
+
+% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
+% expanded by \write.
+\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
+ \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+
+
+% @alias.
+% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
+% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
+\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
+\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+% @xref etc.
+
+\newwrite\auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+ node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
+\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
+\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
+\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\relax
+
+% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
+\def\donoderef{%
+ \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+ {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
+ \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+ \fi
+}
+\def\unnumbnoderef{%
+ \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
+ \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+ \fi
+}
+\def\appendixnoderef{%
+ \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+ {Yappendixletterandtype}%
+ \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+%
+\newcount\savesfregister
+\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
+% anchor), namely NAME-title (the corresponding @chapter/etc. name),
+% NAME-pg (the page number), and NAME-snt (section number and type).
+% Called from \foonoderef.
+%
+% We have to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section
+% title aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in
+% the first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
+%
+% Likewise, use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
+% and backslash work in node names.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{{%
+ \atdummies
+ \pdfmkdest{#1}%
+ %
+ \turnoffactive
+ \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+ \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+ \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
+}}
+
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+ \unsepspaces
+ \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+ \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
+ \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+ \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+ % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+ % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+ \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \else
+ % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+ % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+ % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+ \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \else
+ \ifhavexrefs
+ % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+ \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+ \else
+ % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+ \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \fi%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ %
+ % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+ % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+ % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
+ % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+ % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+ % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+ \ifpdf
+ \leavevmode
+ \getfilename{#4}%
+ {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
+ \ifnum\filenamelength>0
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+ goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
+ \else
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+ goto name{#1}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \linkcolor
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+ \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+ \else
+ % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+ % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+ % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+ % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+ % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+ {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
+ % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+ % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+ \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+ \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+ }%
+ % [mynode],
+ [\printednodename],\space
+ % page 3
+ \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+ \fi
+ \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% \dosetq is called from \setref to do the actual \write (\iflinks).
+%
+\def\dosetq#1#2{%
+ {\let\folio=0%
+ \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
+ \iflinks \next \fi
+ }%
+}
+
+% \internalsetq{foo}{page} expands into
+% CHARACTERS @xrdef{foo}{...expansion of \page...}
+\def\internalsetq#1#2{@xrdef{#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
+
+% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq.
+%
+\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
+\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
+\def\Ynothing{}
+\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
+ \ifnum\secno=0
+ \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
+ \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
+ \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+ \else
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}
+
+\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
+ \ifnum\secno=0
+ \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
+ \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
+ \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+ \else
+ \putwordSection@tie
+ @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+ \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+\else
+ \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+%
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+ {%
+ \indexnofonts
+ \otherbackslash
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
+ \csname X#1\endcsname
+ }%
+ \ifx\thisrefX\relax
+ % If not defined, say something at least.
+ \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+ \iflinks
+ \ifhavexrefs
+ \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+ \else
+ \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+ \global\warnedxrefstrue
+ \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % It's defined, so just use it.
+ \thisrefX
+ \fi
+ #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+%
+\def\xrdef#1{\expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
+\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^@=\other
+ \catcode`\^^A=\other
+ \catcode`\^^B=\other
+ \catcode`\^^C=\other
+ \catcode`\^^D=\other
+ \catcode`\^^E=\other
+ \catcode`\^^F=\other
+ \catcode`\^^G=\other
+ \catcode`\^^H=\other
+ \catcode`\^^K=\other
+ \catcode`\^^L=\other
+ \catcode`\^^N=\other
+ \catcode`\^^P=\other
+ \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+ \catcode`\^^R=\other
+ \catcode`\^^S=\other
+ \catcode`\^^T=\other
+ \catcode`\^^U=\other
+ \catcode`\^^V=\other
+ \catcode`\^^W=\other
+ \catcode`\^^X=\other
+ \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+ \catcode`\^^[=\other
+ \catcode`\^^\=\other
+ \catcode`\^^]=\other
+ \catcode`\^^^=\other
+ \catcode`\^^_=\other
+ % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+ % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+ % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
+ % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+ % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+ % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+ % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
+ % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+ %
+ % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+ % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+ % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+ %
+ \catcode`\^=\other
+ %
+ % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
+ \catcode`\~=\other
+ \catcode`\[=\other
+ \catcode`\]=\other
+ \catcode`\"=\other
+ \catcode`\_=\other
+ \catcode`\|=\other
+ \catcode`\<=\other
+ \catcode`\>=\other
+ \catcode`\$=\other
+ \catcode`\#=\other
+ \catcode`\&=\other
+ \catcode`\%=\other
+ \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+ %
+ % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+ {%
+ \count 1=128
+ \def\loop{%
+ \catcode\count 1=\other
+ \advance\count 1 by 1
+ \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ %
+ % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
+ % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
+ % For example, @xrdef{$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
+ % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
+ % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+ %
+ % @ is our escape character in .aux files.
+ \catcode`\{=1
+ \catcode`\}=2
+ \catcode`\@=0
+ %
+ \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \closein 1
+ \input \jobname.aux
+ \global\havexrefstrue
+ \global\warnedobstrue
+ \fi
+ % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+ \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% Footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+ \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+ \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+ %
+ % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+ % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+ \let\@sf\empty
+ \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+ %
+ % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+ \unskip
+ \thisfootno\@sf
+ \dofootnote
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+% The start of the footnote looks usually like this:
+\gdef\startfootins{\insert\footins\bgroup}
+%
+% ... but this macro is redefined inside @multitable.
+%
+\gdef\dofootnote{%
+ \startfootins
+ % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+ % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+ % So reset some parameters.
+ \hsize=\pagewidth
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+ \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+ \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+ \floatingpenalty\@MM
+ \leftskip\z@skip
+ \rightskip\z@skip
+ \spaceskip\z@skip
+ \xspaceskip\z@skip
+ \parindent\defaultparindent
+ %
+ \smallfonts \rm
+ %
+ % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
+ % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
+ % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
+ % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
+ \let\noindent = \relax
+ %
+ % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
+ % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
+ \everypar = {\hang}%
+ \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+ %
+ % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
+ % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+ % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+ \footstrut
+ \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
+% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+ % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+ \leavevmode
+ %
+ % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+ \vadjust{%
+ % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+ % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+ \vskip-\baselineskip
+ %
+ % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
+ % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+ \llap{%
+ %
+ % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+ \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+ %
+ % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+ \hskip 12pt
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+%
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+ \closein 1
+ % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
+ % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
+ \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+ \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+%
+% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+ work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+ it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+%
+\def\image#1{%
+ \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+ \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+ \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+ \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+ \global\warnednoepsftrue
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
+ \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
+% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
+% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+\newif\ifimagevmode
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
+ \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
+ % If the image is by itself, center it.
+ \ifvmode
+ \imagevmodetrue
+ \nobreak\bigskip
+ % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
+ % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
+ % above and below.
+ \nobreak\vskip\parskip
+ \nobreak
+ \line\bgroup\hss
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Output the image.
+ \ifpdf
+ \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \else
+ % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+ \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image
+\endgroup}
+
+
+\message{localization,}
+% and i18n.
+
+% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
+% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything
+% properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
+% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
+%
+\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
+\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
+ \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
+ % Read the file if it exists.
+ \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+ \ifeof1
+ \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+ \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+ \let\temp = \relax
+ \else
+ \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
+ \fi
+ \temp
+ \endgroup
+}
+\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
+is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory
+should work if nowhere else does.}
+
+
+% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
+% likely, but for now just recognize it.
+\let\documentencoding = \comment
+
+
+% Page size parameters.
+%
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness = 10000
+
+% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 2000
+
+% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
+%
+\def\setemergencystretch{%
+ \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+ % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+ \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+ \else
+ \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
+% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)
+% physical page width.
+%
+% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
+% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
+ \voffset = #3\relax
+ \topskip = #6\relax
+ \splittopskip = \topskip
+ %
+ \vsize = #1\relax
+ \advance\vsize by \topskip
+ \outervsize = \vsize
+ \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
+ \pageheight = \vsize
+ %
+ \hsize = #2\relax
+ \outerhsize = \hsize
+ \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+ \pagewidth = \hsize
+ %
+ \normaloffset = #4\relax
+ \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+ %
+ \ifpdf
+ \pdfpageheight #7\relax
+ \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
+ \fi
+ %
+ \setleading{\textleading}
+ %
+ \parindent = \defaultparindent
+ \setemergencystretch
+}
+
+% @letterpaper (the default).
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \textleading = 13.2pt
+ %
+ % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+ \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
+ {\voffset}{.25in}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+ {11in}{8.5in}%
+}}
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+ \textleading = 12pt
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
+ {\voffset}{.25in}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+ {9.25in}{7in}%
+ %
+ \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+ \tolerance = 700
+ \hfuzz = 1pt
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+ \defbodyindent = .5cm
+}}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \textleading = 13.2pt
+ %
+ % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
+ % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
+ % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
+ % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
+ % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
+ % your texinfo source file like this:
+ % @tex
+ % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
+ % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
+ % @end tex
+ \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
+ {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+ {297mm}{210mm}%
+ %
+ \tolerance = 700
+ \hfuzz = 1pt
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+ \defbodyindent = 5mm
+}}
+
+% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
+% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
+% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
+\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
+ \textleading = 12.5pt
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
+ {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+ {210mm}{148mm}%
+ %
+ \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
+ \tolerance = 800
+ \hfuzz = 1.2pt
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+ \defbodyindent = 2mm
+ \tableindent = 12mm
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \afourpaper
+ \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
+ {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+ {297mm}{210mm}%
+ %
+ % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
+ \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
+\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \afourpaper
+ \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
+ {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+ {297mm}{210mm}%
+ \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+%
+\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
+\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+ \globaldefs = 1
+ %
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \setleading{\textleading}%
+ %
+ \dimen0 = #1
+ \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
+ %
+ \dimen2 = \hsize
+ \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
+ {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+ {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
+}}
+
+% Set default to letter.
+%
+\letterpaper
+
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\catcode`\$=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
+% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
+% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
+% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
+% this is not a problem.
+\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt\char126}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+\catcode`\$=\active
+\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
+
+% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
+{\catcode`\==\active
+\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
+
+\catcode`+=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \rawbackslashxx outputs one backslash character in current font,
+% as in \char`\\.
+\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
+
+% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \rawbackslashxx.
+% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
+% catcode other.
+{\catcode`\\=\active
+ @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx}
+ @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
+}
+
+% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
+{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+
+% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+
+\catcode`\\=\active
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
+% even after parsing them.
+@def@turnoffactive{%
+ @let"=@normaldoublequote
+ @let\=@realbackslash
+ @let~=@normaltilde
+ @let^=@normalcaret
+ @let_=@normalunderscore
+ @let|=@normalverticalbar
+ @let<=@normalless
+ @let>=@normalgreater
+ @let+=@normalplus
+ @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
+}
+
+% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
+% the literal character `\'. (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
+% effect.)
+%
+@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+@otherifyactive
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{%
+ @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+ @catcode`+=@active
+ @catcode`@_=@active
+}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+@escapechar = `@@
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
+@catcode`@& = @other
+@catcode`@# = @other
+@catcode`@% = @other
+
+@c Set initial fonts.
+@textfonts
+@rm
+
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+@c time-stamp-end: "}"
+@c End:
#include "parser.h"
#include "mailcheck.h"
#include "test.h"
+#include "builtins.h"
#include "builtins/common.h"
#include "builtins/builtext.h"
static REDIRECTEE redir;
-#line 299 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 300 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
typedef union {
WORD_DESC *word; /* the word that we read. */
int number; /* the number that we read. */
#if YYDEBUG != 0
static const short yyrline[] = { 0,
- 350, 359, 366, 381, 391, 393, 397, 402, 407, 412,
- 417, 422, 427, 433, 439, 444, 449, 454, 459, 464,
- 469, 474, 479, 484, 489, 496, 503, 508, 513, 518,
- 523, 528, 533, 538, 543, 550, 552, 554, 558, 562,
- 573, 575, 579, 581, 583, 599, 603, 605, 607, 609,
- 611, 613, 615, 617, 619, 621, 623, 627, 632, 637,
- 642, 647, 652, 657, 662, 669, 674, 679, 684, 691,
- 696, 701, 706, 711, 716, 723, 728, 733, 740, 743,
- 746, 751, 753, 784, 791, 793, 795, 800, 804, 808,
- 812, 814, 816, 820, 821, 825, 827, 829, 831, 835,
- 836, 840, 842, 851, 859, 860, 866, 867, 874, 878,
- 880, 882, 889, 891, 893, 897, 898, 901, 903, 905,
- 909, 910, 919, 925, 934, 942, 944, 946, 953, 956,
- 960, 962, 967, 972, 977, 982, 1002, 1005, 1009, 1011
+ 351, 360, 367, 382, 392, 394, 398, 403, 408, 413,
+ 418, 423, 428, 434, 440, 445, 450, 455, 460, 465,
+ 470, 475, 480, 485, 490, 497, 504, 509, 514, 519,
+ 524, 529, 534, 539, 544, 551, 553, 555, 559, 563,
+ 574, 576, 580, 582, 584, 600, 604, 606, 608, 610,
+ 612, 614, 616, 618, 620, 622, 624, 628, 633, 638,
+ 643, 648, 653, 658, 663, 670, 675, 680, 685, 692,
+ 697, 702, 707, 712, 717, 724, 729, 734, 741, 744,
+ 747, 752, 754, 785, 792, 794, 796, 801, 805, 809,
+ 813, 815, 817, 821, 822, 826, 828, 830, 832, 836,
+ 837, 841, 843, 852, 860, 861, 867, 868, 875, 879,
+ 881, 883, 890, 892, 894, 898, 899, 902, 904, 906,
+ 910, 911, 920, 926, 935, 943, 945, 947, 954, 957,
+ 961, 963, 969, 975, 981, 987, 1007, 1010, 1014, 1016
};
#endif
switch (yyn) {
case 1:
-#line 351 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 352 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
/* Case of regular command. Discard the error
safety net,and return the command just parsed. */
;
break;}
case 2:
-#line 360 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 361 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
/* Case of regular command, but not a very
interesting one. Return a NULL command. */
;
break;}
case 3:
-#line 367 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 368 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
/* Error during parsing. Return NULL command. */
global_command = (COMMAND *)NULL;
;
break;}
case 4:
-#line 382 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 383 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
/* Case of EOF seen by itself. Do ignoreeof or
not. */
;
break;}
case 5:
-#line 392 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 393 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.word_list = make_word_list (yyvsp[0].word, (WORD_LIST *)NULL); ;
break;}
case 6:
-#line 394 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 395 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.word_list = make_word_list (yyvsp[0].word, yyvsp[-1].word_list); ;
break;}
case 7:
-#line 398 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 399 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_output_direction, redir);
;
break;}
case 8:
-#line 403 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 404 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_input_direction, redir);
;
break;}
case 9:
-#line 408 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 409 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_output_direction, redir);
;
break;}
case 10:
-#line 413 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 414 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_input_direction, redir);
;
break;}
case 11:
-#line 418 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 419 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_appending_to, redir);
;
break;}
case 12:
-#line 423 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 424 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_appending_to, redir);
;
break;}
case 13:
-#line 428 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 429 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_reading_until, redir);
;
break;}
case 14:
-#line 434 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 435 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_reading_until, redir);
;
break;}
case 15:
-#line 440 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 441 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_reading_string, redir);
;
break;}
case 16:
-#line 445 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 446 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_reading_string, redir);
;
break;}
case 17:
-#line 450 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 451 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.dest = yyvsp[0].number;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_duplicating_input, redir);
;
break;}
case 18:
-#line 455 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 456 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.dest = yyvsp[0].number;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_duplicating_input, redir);
;
break;}
case 19:
-#line 460 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 461 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.dest = yyvsp[0].number;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_duplicating_output, redir);
;
break;}
case 20:
-#line 465 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 466 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.dest = yyvsp[0].number;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_duplicating_output, redir);
;
break;}
case 21:
-#line 470 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 471 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_duplicating_input_word, redir);
;
break;}
case 22:
-#line 475 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 476 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_duplicating_input_word, redir);
;
break;}
case 23:
-#line 480 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 481 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_duplicating_output_word, redir);
;
break;}
case 24:
-#line 485 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 486 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_duplicating_output_word, redir);
;
break;}
case 25:
-#line 490 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 491 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection
;
break;}
case 26:
-#line 497 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 498 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection
;
break;}
case 27:
-#line 504 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 505 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.dest = 0;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_close_this, redir);
;
break;}
case 28:
-#line 509 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 510 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.dest = 0;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_close_this, redir);
;
break;}
case 29:
-#line 514 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 515 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.dest = 0;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_close_this, redir);
;
break;}
case 30:
-#line 519 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 520 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.dest = 0;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_close_this, redir);
;
break;}
case 31:
-#line 524 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 525 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_err_and_out, redir);
;
break;}
case 32:
-#line 529 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 530 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_input_output, redir);
;
break;}
case 33:
-#line 534 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 535 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (0, r_input_output, redir);
;
break;}
case 34:
-#line 539 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 540 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (1, r_output_force, redir);
;
break;}
case 35:
-#line 544 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 545 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
redir.filename = yyvsp[0].word;
yyval.redirect = make_redirection (yyvsp[-2].number, r_output_force, redir);
;
break;}
case 36:
-#line 551 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 552 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.element.word = yyvsp[0].word; yyval.element.redirect = 0; ;
break;}
case 37:
-#line 553 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 554 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.element.word = yyvsp[0].word; yyval.element.redirect = 0; ;
break;}
case 38:
-#line 555 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 556 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.element.redirect = yyvsp[0].redirect; yyval.element.word = 0; ;
break;}
case 39:
-#line 559 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 560 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.redirect = yyvsp[0].redirect;
;
break;}
case 40:
-#line 563 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 564 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
register REDIRECT *t;
;
break;}
case 41:
-#line 574 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 575 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_simple_command (yyvsp[0].element, (COMMAND *)NULL); ;
break;}
case 42:
-#line 576 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 577 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_simple_command (yyvsp[0].element, yyvsp[-1].command); ;
break;}
case 43:
-#line 580 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 581 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = clean_simple_command (yyvsp[0].command); ;
break;}
case 44:
-#line 582 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 583 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 45:
-#line 584 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 585 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
COMMAND *tc;
;
break;}
case 46:
-#line 600 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 601 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 47:
-#line 604 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 605 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 48:
-#line 606 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 607 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 49:
-#line 608 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 609 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_while_command (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[-1].command); ;
break;}
case 50:
-#line 610 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 611 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_until_command (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[-1].command); ;
break;}
case 51:
-#line 612 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 613 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 52:
-#line 614 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 615 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 53:
-#line 616 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 617 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 54:
-#line 618 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 619 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 55:
-#line 620 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 621 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 56:
-#line 622 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 623 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 57:
-#line 624 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 625 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 58:
-#line 628 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 629 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-4].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 59:
-#line 633 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 634 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-4].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 60:
-#line 638 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 639 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-5].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 61:
-#line 643 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 644 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-5].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 62:
-#line 648 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 649 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-8].word, REVERSE_LIST (yyvsp[-5].word_list, WORD_LIST *), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 63:
-#line 653 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 654 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-8].word, REVERSE_LIST (yyvsp[-5].word_list, WORD_LIST *), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 64:
-#line 658 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 659 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-7].word, (WORD_LIST *)NULL, yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 65:
-#line 663 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 664 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_for_command (yyvsp[-7].word, (WORD_LIST *)NULL, yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 66:
-#line 670 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 671 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_arith_for_command (yyvsp[-5].word_list, yyvsp[-1].command, arith_for_lineno);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 67:
-#line 675 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 676 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_arith_for_command (yyvsp[-5].word_list, yyvsp[-1].command, arith_for_lineno);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 68:
-#line 680 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 681 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_arith_for_command (yyvsp[-3].word_list, yyvsp[-1].command, arith_for_lineno);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 69:
-#line 685 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 686 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_arith_for_command (yyvsp[-3].word_list, yyvsp[-1].command, arith_for_lineno);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 70:
-#line 692 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 693 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-4].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 71:
-#line 697 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 698 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-4].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 72:
-#line 702 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 703 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-5].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 73:
-#line 707 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 708 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-5].word, add_string_to_list ("\"$@\"", (WORD_LIST *)NULL), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 74:
-#line 712 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 713 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-8].word, REVERSE_LIST (yyvsp[-5].word_list, WORD_LIST *), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 75:
-#line 717 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 718 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_select_command (yyvsp[-8].word, REVERSE_LIST (yyvsp[-5].word_list, WORD_LIST *), yyvsp[-1].command, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 76:
-#line 724 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 725 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_case_command (yyvsp[-4].word, (PATTERN_LIST *)NULL, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 77:
-#line 729 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 730 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_case_command (yyvsp[-5].word, yyvsp[-2].pattern, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 78:
-#line 734 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 735 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_case_command (yyvsp[-4].word, yyvsp[-1].pattern, word_lineno[word_top]);
if (word_top > 0) word_top--;
;
break;}
case 79:
-#line 741 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 742 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_function_def (yyvsp[-4].word, yyvsp[0].command, function_dstart, function_bstart); ;
break;}
case 80:
-#line 744 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 745 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_function_def (yyvsp[-4].word, yyvsp[0].command, function_dstart, function_bstart); ;
break;}
case 81:
-#line 747 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 748 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_function_def (yyvsp[-2].word, yyvsp[0].command, function_dstart, function_bstart); ;
break;}
case 82:
-#line 752 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 753 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 83:
-#line 754 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 755 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
COMMAND *tc;
;
break;}
case 84:
-#line 785 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 786 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = make_subshell_command (yyvsp[-1].command);
yyval.command->flags |= CMD_WANT_SUBSHELL;
;
break;}
case 85:
-#line 792 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 793 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[-1].command, (COMMAND *)NULL); ;
break;}
case 86:
-#line 794 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 795 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-5].command, yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[-1].command); ;
break;}
case 87:
-#line 796 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 797 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-4].command, yyvsp[-2].command, yyvsp[-1].command); ;
break;}
case 88:
-#line 801 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 802 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_group_command (yyvsp[-1].command); ;
break;}
case 89:
-#line 805 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 806 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_arith_command (yyvsp[0].word_list); ;
break;}
case 90:
-#line 809 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 810 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[-1].command; ;
break;}
case 91:
-#line 813 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 814 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-2].command, yyvsp[0].command, (COMMAND *)NULL); ;
break;}
case 92:
-#line 815 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 816 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-4].command, yyvsp[-2].command, yyvsp[0].command); ;
break;}
case 93:
-#line 817 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 818 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = make_if_command (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[-1].command, yyvsp[0].command); ;
break;}
case 95:
-#line 822 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 823 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyvsp[0].pattern->next = yyvsp[-1].pattern; yyval.pattern = yyvsp[0].pattern; ;
break;}
case 96:
-#line 826 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 827 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.pattern = make_pattern_list (yyvsp[-2].word_list, yyvsp[0].command); ;
break;}
case 97:
-#line 828 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 829 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.pattern = make_pattern_list (yyvsp[-2].word_list, (COMMAND *)NULL); ;
break;}
case 98:
-#line 830 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 831 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.pattern = make_pattern_list (yyvsp[-2].word_list, yyvsp[0].command); ;
break;}
case 99:
-#line 832 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 833 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.pattern = make_pattern_list (yyvsp[-2].word_list, (COMMAND *)NULL); ;
break;}
case 101:
-#line 837 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 838 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyvsp[-1].pattern->next = yyvsp[-2].pattern; yyval.pattern = yyvsp[-1].pattern; ;
break;}
case 102:
-#line 841 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 842 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.word_list = make_word_list (yyvsp[0].word, (WORD_LIST *)NULL); ;
break;}
case 103:
-#line 843 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 844 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.word_list = make_word_list (yyvsp[0].word, yyvsp[-2].word_list); ;
break;}
case 104:
-#line 852 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 853 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
if (need_here_doc)
;
break;}
case 106:
-#line 861 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 862 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
;
break;}
case 108:
-#line 868 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 869 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
if (yyvsp[-2].command->type == cm_connection)
yyval.command = connect_async_list (yyvsp[-2].command, (COMMAND *)NULL, '&');
;
break;}
case 110:
-#line 879 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 880 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, AND_AND); ;
break;}
case 111:
-#line 881 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 882 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, OR_OR); ;
break;}
case 112:
-#line 883 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 884 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
if (yyvsp[-3].command->type == cm_connection)
yyval.command = connect_async_list (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, '&');
;
break;}
case 113:
-#line 890 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 891 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, ';'); ;
break;}
case 114:
-#line 892 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 893 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, ';'); ;
break;}
case 115:
-#line 894 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 895 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 118:
-#line 902 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 903 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.number = '\n'; ;
break;}
case 119:
-#line 904 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 905 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.number = ';'; ;
break;}
case 120:
-#line 906 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 907 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.number = yacc_EOF; ;
break;}
case 123:
-#line 920 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 921 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
if (need_here_doc)
;
break;}
case 124:
-#line 926 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 927 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
if (yyvsp[-1].command->type == cm_connection)
yyval.command = connect_async_list (yyvsp[-1].command, (COMMAND *)NULL, '&');
;
break;}
case 125:
-#line 935 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 936 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
yyval.command = yyvsp[-1].command;
if (need_here_doc)
;
break;}
case 126:
-#line 943 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 944 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, AND_AND); ;
break;}
case 127:
-#line 945 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 946 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, OR_OR); ;
break;}
case 128:
-#line 947 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 948 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
if (yyvsp[-2].command->type == cm_connection)
yyval.command = connect_async_list (yyvsp[-2].command, yyvsp[0].command, '&');
;
break;}
case 129:
-#line 954 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 955 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-2].command, yyvsp[0].command, ';'); ;
break;}
case 130:
-#line 957 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 958 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 131:
-#line 961 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 962 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 132:
-#line 963 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 964 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
- yyvsp[0].command->flags |= CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
+ if (yyvsp[0].command)
+ yyvsp[0].command->flags |= CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
;
break;}
case 133:
-#line 968 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 970 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
- yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-1].number;
+ if (yyvsp[0].command)
+ yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-1].number;
yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
;
break;}
case 134:
-#line 973 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 976 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
- yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-2].number|CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
+ if (yyvsp[0].command)
+ yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-2].number|CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
;
break;}
case 135:
-#line 978 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 982 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
- yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-1].number|CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
+ if (yyvsp[0].command)
+ yyvsp[0].command->flags |= yyvsp[-1].number|CMD_INVERT_RETURN;
yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command;
;
break;}
case 136:
-#line 983 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 988 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{
ELEMENT x;
;
break;}
case 137:
-#line 1004 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 1009 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = command_connect (yyvsp[-3].command, yyvsp[0].command, '|'); ;
break;}
case 138:
-#line 1006 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 1011 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.command = yyvsp[0].command; ;
break;}
case 139:
-#line 1010 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 1015 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.number = CMD_TIME_PIPELINE; ;
break;}
case 140:
-#line 1012 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 1017 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
{ yyval.number = CMD_TIME_PIPELINE|CMD_TIME_POSIX; ;
break;}
}
}
return 1;
}
-#line 1014 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
+#line 1019 "/Users/chet/src/bash/src/parse.y"
/* Possible states for the parser that require it to do special things. */
#define PST_ALEXPAND 0x0800 /* OK to expand aliases - unused */
#define PST_CMDTOKEN 0x1000 /* command token OK - unused */
#define PST_COMPASSIGN 0x2000 /* parsing x=(...) compound assignment */
+#define PST_ASSIGNOK 0x4000 /* assignment statement ok in this context */
/* Initial size to allocate for tokens, and the
amount to grow them by. */
result = EOF;
if (bash_input.location.file)
- result = getc_with_restart (bash_input.location.file);
-
+ {
+ if (interactive)
+ interrupt_immediately++;
+ result = getc_with_restart (bash_input.location.file);
+ if (interactive)
+ interrupt_immediately--;
+ }
return (result);
}
pass_next = 0;
while (1)
{
- c = yy_getc ();
-
/* Allow immediate exit if interrupted during input. */
QUIT;
+ c = yy_getc ();
+
/* Ignore null bytes in input. */
if (c == 0)
{
QUIT;
+ if (sigwinch_received)
+ {
+ sigwinch_received = 0;
+ get_new_window_size (0);
+ }
+
if (eol_ungetc_lookahead)
{
c = eol_ungetc_lookahead;
if (uc)
shell_input_line_index++;
- if MBTEST(uc == '\\' && remove_quoted_newline && shell_input_line[shell_input_line_index] == '\n')
- {
- if (SHOULD_PROMPT ())
- prompt_again ();
- line_number++;
- goto restart_read;
- }
-
#if defined (ALIAS) || defined (DPAREN_ARITHMETIC)
/* If UC is NULL, we have reached the end of the current input string. If
pushed_string_list is non-empty, it's time to pop to the previous string
}
#endif /* ALIAS || DPAREN_ARITHMETIC */
+ if MBTEST(uc == '\\' && remove_quoted_newline && shell_input_line[shell_input_line_index] == '\n')
+ {
+ if (SHOULD_PROMPT ())
+ prompt_again ();
+ line_number++;
+ goto restart_read;
+ }
+
if (!uc && shell_input_line_terminator == EOF)
return ((shell_input_line_index != 0) ? '\n' : EOF);
parse_and_execute (savestring (command), "PROMPT_COMMAND", SEVAL_NONINT|SEVAL_NOHIST);
restore_parser_state (&ps);
- bind_variable ("_", last_lastarg);
+ bind_variable ("_", last_lastarg, 0);
FREE (last_lastarg);
if (token_to_read == '\n') /* reset_parser was called */
parser_state &= ~PST_ALEXPNEXT;
#endif /* ALIAS */
+ parser_state &= ~PST_ASSIGNOK;
+
return (character);
}
parser_state &= ~PST_ALEXPNEXT;
#endif /* ALIAS */
+ parser_state &= ~PST_ASSIGNOK;
+
peek_char = shell_getc (1);
if (character == peek_char)
{
#if defined (ALIAS)
parser_state &= ~PST_ALEXPNEXT;
#endif /* ALIAS */
+
return (SEMI_SEMI);
case '&':
/*
* Match a $(...) or other grouping construct. This has to handle embedded
* quoted strings ('', ``, "") and nested constructs. It also must handle
- * reprompting the user, if necessary, after reading a newline (unless the
- * P_NONL flag is passed), and returning correct error values if it reads
- * EOF.
+ * reprompting the user, if necessary, after reading a newline, and returning
+ * correct error values if it reads EOF.
*/
#define P_FIRSTCLOSE 0x01
#define P_ALLOWESC 0x02
#define P_DQUOTE 0x04
+#define P_COMMAND 0x08 /* parsing a command, so look for comments */
static char matched_pair_error;
static char *
int open, close;
int *lenp, flags;
{
- int count, ch, was_dollar;
+ int count, ch, was_dollar, in_comment, check_comment;
int pass_next_character, nestlen, ttranslen, start_lineno;
char *ret, *nestret, *ttrans;
int retind, retsize, rflags;
count = 1;
- pass_next_character = was_dollar = 0;
+ pass_next_character = was_dollar = in_comment = 0;
+ check_comment = (flags & P_COMMAND) && qc != '\'' && qc != '"' && (flags & P_DQUOTE) == 0;
/* RFLAGS is the set of flags we want to pass to recursive calls. */
rflags = (qc == '"') ? P_DQUOTE : (flags & P_DQUOTE);
start_lineno = line_number;
while (count)
{
+#if 0
ch = shell_getc ((qc != '\'' || (flags & P_ALLOWESC)) && pass_next_character == 0);
+#else
+ ch = shell_getc (qc != '\'' && pass_next_character == 0);
+#endif
if (ch == EOF)
{
free (ret);
if (ch == '\n' && SHOULD_PROMPT ())
prompt_again ();
+ if (in_comment)
+ {
+ /* Add this character. */
+ RESIZE_MALLOCED_BUFFER (ret, retind, 1, retsize, 64);
+ ret[retind++] = ch;
+
+ if (ch == '\n')
+ in_comment = 0;
+
+ continue;
+ }
+ /* Not exactly right yet */
+ else if (check_comment && in_comment == 0 && ch == '#' && (retind == 0 || ret[retind-1] == '\n' || whitespace (ret[retind -1])))
+ in_comment = 1;
+
if (pass_next_character) /* last char was backslash */
{
pass_next_character = 0;
/* Translate $'...' here. */
ttrans = ansiexpand (nestret, 0, nestlen - 1, &ttranslen);
xfree (nestret);
- nestret = sh_single_quote (ttrans);
- free (ttrans);
- nestlen = strlen (nestret);
+
+ if ((rflags & P_DQUOTE) == 0)
+ {
+ nestret = sh_single_quote (ttrans);
+ free (ttrans);
+ nestlen = strlen (nestret);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ nestret = ttrans;
+ nestlen = ttranslen;
+ }
retind -= 2; /* back up before the $' */
}
else if MBTEST(was_dollar && ch == '"' && (extended_quote || (rflags & P_DQUOTE) == 0))
/* Locale expand $"..." here. */
ttrans = localeexpand (nestret, 0, nestlen - 1, start_lineno, &ttranslen);
xfree (nestret);
- nestret = (char *)xmalloc (ttranslen + 3);
- nestret[0] = '"';
- strcpy (nestret + 1, ttrans);
- nestret[ttranslen + 1] = '"';
- nestret[ttranslen += 2] = '\0';
+
+ nestret = sh_mkdoublequoted (ttrans, ttranslen, 0);
free (ttrans);
- nestlen = ttranslen;
+ nestlen = ttranslen + 2;
retind -= 2; /* back up before the $" */
}
else if MBTEST(open == '"' && ch == '`')
{
nestret = parse_matched_pair (0, '`', '`', &nestlen, rflags);
+add_nestret:
if (nestret == &matched_pair_error)
{
free (ret);
}
FREE (nestret);
}
+ else if MBTEST(qc == '`' && (ch == '"' || ch == '\'') && in_comment == 0)
+ {
+ nestret = parse_matched_pair (0, ch, ch, &nestlen, rflags);
+ goto add_nestret;
+ }
else if MBTEST(was_dollar && (ch == '(' || ch == '{' || ch == '[')) /* ) } ] */
/* check for $(), $[], or ${} inside quoted string. */
{
nestret = parse_matched_pair (0, '{', '}', &nestlen, P_FIRSTCLOSE|rflags);
else if (ch == '[') /* ] */
nestret = parse_matched_pair (0, '[', ']', &nestlen, rflags);
- if (nestret == &matched_pair_error)
- {
- free (ret);
- return &matched_pair_error;
- }
- if (nestlen)
- {
- RESIZE_MALLOCED_BUFFER (ret, retind, nestlen, retsize, 64);
- strcpy (ret + retind, nestret);
- retind += nestlen;
- }
- FREE (nestret);
+
+ goto add_nestret;
}
was_dollar = MBTEST(ch == '$');
}
cmdtyp = parse_arith_cmd (&wval, 0);
if (cmdtyp == 1)
{
+ wd = alloc_word_desc ();
+ wd->word = wval;
wd = make_word (wval);
yylval.word_list = make_word_list (wd, (WORD_LIST *)NULL);
- free (wval);
return (ARITH_FOR_EXPRS);
}
else
if (reserved_word_acceptable (last_read_token))
{
sline = line_number;
-#if 0
- cmdtyp = parse_arith_cmd (&wval, 1);
-#else
+
cmdtyp = parse_arith_cmd (&wval, 0);
-#endif
if (cmdtyp == 1) /* arithmetic command */
{
- wd = make_word (wval);
-#if 0
- wd->flags = W_QUOTED;
-#else
- wd->flags = W_QUOTED|W_NOSPLIT|W_NOGLOB;
-#endif
+ wd = alloc_word_desc ();
+ wd->word = wval;
+ wd->flags = W_QUOTED|W_NOSPLIT|W_NOGLOB|W_DQUOTE;
yylval.word_list = make_word_list (wd, (WORD_LIST *)NULL);
- free (wval); /* make_word copies it */
return (ARITH_CMD);
}
else if (cmdtyp == 0) /* nested subshell */
return r;
}
+/* XXX - possible changes here for `+=' */
static int
token_is_ident (t, i)
char *t;
/* DOLLAR_PRESENT becomes non-zero if we see a `$'. */
int dollar_present;
+ /* COMPOUND_ASSIGNMENT becomes non-zero if we are parsing a compound
+ assignment. */
+ int compound_assignment;
+
/* QUOTED becomes non-zero if we see one of ("), ('), (`), or (\). */
int quoted;
token_index = 0;
all_digit_token = DIGIT (character);
- dollar_present = quoted = pass_next_character = 0;
+ dollar_present = quoted = pass_next_character = compound_assignment = 0;
for (;;)
{
if MBTEST(shellquote (character))
{
push_delimiter (dstack, character);
- ttok = parse_matched_pair (character, character, character, &ttoklen, 0);
+ ttok = parse_matched_pair (character, character, character, &ttoklen, (character == '`') ? P_COMMAND : 0);
pop_delimiter (dstack);
if (ttok == &matched_pair_error)
return -1; /* Bail immediately. */
history literally rather than causing a possibly-
incorrect `;' to be added. ) */
push_delimiter (dstack, peek_char);
- ttok = parse_matched_pair (cd, '(', ')', &ttoklen, 0);
+ ttok = parse_matched_pair (cd, '(', ')', &ttoklen, P_COMMAND);
pop_delimiter (dstack);
}
else
{
ttrans = ansiexpand (ttok, 0, ttoklen - 1, &ttranslen);
free (ttok);
+
/* Insert the single quotes and correctly quote any
embedded single quotes (allowed because P_ALLOWESC was
passed to parse_matched_pair). */
ttok = sh_single_quote (ttrans);
free (ttrans);
+ ttranslen = strlen (ttok);
ttrans = ttok;
- ttranslen = strlen (ttrans);
}
else
{
- /* Try to locale-expand the converted string. */
+ /* Try to locale)-expand the converted string. */
ttrans = localeexpand (ttok, 0, ttoklen - 1, first_line, &ttranslen);
free (ttok);
/* Add the double quotes back */
- ttok = (char *)xmalloc (ttranslen + 3);
- ttok[0] = '"';
- strcpy (ttok + 1, ttrans);
- ttok[ttranslen + 1] = '"';
- ttok[ttranslen += 2] = '\0';
+ ttok = sh_mkdoublequoted (ttrans, ttranslen, 0);
free (ttrans);
+ ttranslen += 2;
ttrans = ttok;
}
goto next_character;
}
/* Identify possible compound array variable assignment. */
- else if MBTEST(character == '=' && token_index > 0 && token_is_assignment (token, token_index))
+ else if MBTEST(character == '=' && token_index > 0 && (assignment_acceptable (last_read_token) || (parser_state & PST_ASSIGNOK)) && token_is_assignment (token, token_index))
{
peek_char = shell_getc (1);
if MBTEST(peek_char == '(') /* ) */
token[token_index++] = ')';
FREE (ttok);
all_digit_token = 0;
+ compound_assignment = 1;
+#if 0
goto next_character;
+#else
+ goto got_token; /* ksh93 seems to do this */
+#endif
}
else
shell_ungetc (peek_char);
the_word->flags |= W_HASDOLLAR;
if (quoted)
the_word->flags |= W_QUOTED;
+ if (compound_assignment)
+ the_word->flags |= W_COMPASSIGN;
/* A word is an assignment if it appears at the beginning of a
simple command, or after another assignment word. This is
context-dependent, so it cannot be handled in the grammar. */
the_word->flags |= W_NOSPLIT;
}
+ if (command_token_position (last_read_token))
+ {
+ struct builtin *b;
+ b = builtin_address_internal (token, 0);
+ if (b && (b->flags & ASSIGNMENT_BUILTIN))
+ parser_state |= PST_ASSIGNOK;
+ }
+
yylval.word = the_word;
result = ((the_word->flags & (W_ASSIGNMENT|W_NOSPLIT)) == (W_ASSIGNMENT|W_NOSPLIT))
return " ";
return ";";
}
+ else if (two_tokens_ago == CASE && token_before_that == WORD && (parser_state & PST_CASESTMT))
+ return " ";
for (i = 0; no_semi_successors[i]; i++)
{
#define ROOT_PATH(x) ((x)[0] == '/' && (x)[1] == 0)
#define DOUBLE_SLASH_ROOT(x) ((x)[0] == '/' && (x)[1] == '/' && (x)[2] == 0)
/* Abbreviate \W as ~ if $PWD == $HOME */
- if (c == 'W' && (((t = get_string_value ("HOME")) == 0) || STREQ (t, temp) == 0))
+ if (c == 'W' && (((t = get_string_value ("HOME")) == 0) || STREQ (t, t_string) == 0))
{
if (ROOT_PATH (t_string) == 0 && DOUBLE_SLASH_ROOT (t_string) == 0)
{
line_number = orig_line_number + line_number - 1;
orig_current_token = current_token;
current_token = tok;
- yyerror ((char *)NULL); /* does the right thing */
+ yyerror (NULL); /* does the right thing */
current_token = orig_current_token;
if (wl)
dispose_words (wl);
if (tok == yacc_EOF) /* ( */
parser_error (orig_line_number, _("unexpected EOF while looking for matching `)'"));
else
- yyerror ((char *)NULL); /* does the right thing */
+ yyerror(NULL); /* does the right thing */
if (wl)
dispose_words (wl);
wl = &parse_string_error;
#endif
if (ps == 0)
- ps = xmalloc (sizeof (sh_parser_state_t));
+ ps = (sh_parser_state_t *)xmalloc (sizeof (sh_parser_state_t));
if (ps == 0)
return ((sh_parser_state_t *)NULL);
projects / platform / upstream / bash.git / commitdiff